WO2019177645A1 - Reagent container for an aldehyde analysis system and method of use - Google Patents

Reagent container for an aldehyde analysis system and method of use Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019177645A1
WO2019177645A1 PCT/US2018/036545 US2018036545W WO2019177645A1 WO 2019177645 A1 WO2019177645 A1 WO 2019177645A1 US 2018036545 W US2018036545 W US 2018036545W WO 2019177645 A1 WO2019177645 A1 WO 2019177645A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
analysis device
reagent
reagent container
internal chamber
module
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2018/036545
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Chris Marsh
Craig CARLSEN
Nate BONN-SAVAGE
Original Assignee
Chris Marsh
Carlsen Craig
Bonn Savage Nate
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Chris Marsh, Carlsen Craig, Bonn Savage Nate filed Critical Chris Marsh
Publication of WO2019177645A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019177645A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/483Physical analysis of biological material
    • G01N33/497Physical analysis of biological material of gaseous biological material, e.g. breath
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/08Detecting, measuring or recording devices for evaluating the respiratory organs
    • A61B5/097Devices for facilitating collection of breath or for directing breath into or through measuring devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/0004Gaseous mixtures, e.g. polluted air
    • G01N33/0009General constructional details of gas analysers, e.g. portable test equipment
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/483Physical analysis of biological material
    • G01N33/497Physical analysis of biological material of gaseous biological material, e.g. breath
    • G01N33/4975Physical analysis of biological material of gaseous biological material, e.g. breath other than oxygen, carbon dioxide or alcohol, e.g. organic vapours
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • G01N35/10Devices for transferring samples or any liquids to, in, or from, the analysis apparatus, e.g. suction devices, injection devices
    • G01N35/1002Reagent dispensers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • G01N35/10Devices for transferring samples or any liquids to, in, or from, the analysis apparatus, e.g. suction devices, injection devices
    • G01N35/1095Devices for transferring samples or any liquids to, in, or from, the analysis apparatus, e.g. suction devices, injection devices for supplying the samples to flow-through analysers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/08Detecting, measuring or recording devices for evaluating the respiratory organs
    • A61B5/082Evaluation by breath analysis, e.g. determination of the chemical composition of exhaled breath

Definitions

  • the described embodiments relate generally to consumables for diagnostic devices and methods of use. More particularly, the present embodiments relate to storing and dispensing multiple chemical compounds, such as methanol, dyes, calibrant, from an integrated consumable structure.
  • chemical compounds such as methanol, dyes, calibrant
  • Breath from a patient or user may contain aldehydes that can provide information on the general health and wellness of the patient.
  • Aldehydes in breath (or urine, plasma, or headspace of biopsied cells) may be detected and analyzed to measure oxidation stress, among other characteristics, that may assist in a medical diagnosis of the patient.
  • a high-pressure liquid chromatography (“HPLC”) process may be used to separate and measure relative values of aldehydes contained within breath.
  • an HPLC process may use multiple chemical or reagents.
  • the HPLC process may also require filtered air, generate waste, among other requirements.
  • Individual management of the inputs and outputs of the HPLC process may cumbersome and may operate to decrease the safety and reliably of such techniques.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure are directed to a breath analysis system for determining an aldehyde content of a breath sample.
  • the present disclosure includes a reagent container for an analysis device.
  • the reagent container further includes a first reagent.
  • the reagent container further includes a second reagent.
  • the reagent container further includes an air filter.
  • the reagent container further includes an enclosure having a group of internal chambers separating the first reagent, the second reagent, and the air filter from one another within the enclosure.
  • the reagent container may be configured to be received by the analysis device.
  • Each of the group of internal chambers may be fluidically coupled to a conduit that defines a flow path between the analysis device and a corresponding one of the first reagent, the second reagent, or the air filter.
  • the present disclosure includes a reagent container for an analysis device.
  • the reagent container includes an enclosure configured to be received by the analysis device.
  • the enclosure may have a first internal chamber and a second internal chamber.
  • the reagent container further includes a first directional flow valve positioned along a first flow path extending from the first internal chamber and into the analysis device.
  • the reagent container further includes a second directional flow valve positioned along a second flow path extending from the analysis device and into the second internal chamber
  • the reagent container may be configured to allow air into the first internal chamber.
  • the reagent container may be configured expel air from the second internal chamber.
  • the present disclosure includes a method for operating a reagent container with an analysis device.
  • the method includes a first step of inserting the reagent container into the analysis device.
  • the method includes a second step of dispensing reagent from a first of a group of internal chambers of the reagent container.
  • the method further includes the third step of dispensing filtered air from a second of the group of internal chambers of the reagent container.
  • the method further includes the fourth step of receiving waste from the analysis device into a third of the group of internal chambers of the reagent container.
  • the method further includes a fifth step of repeating steps two through four for a second breath sample analyzed by the analysis device.
  • FIG. 1 depicts an analysis device
  • FIG. 2A depicts a breath capture component having a breath sample from a user
  • FIG. 2B depicts the breath capture component of FIG. 2A attached to a cartridge
  • FIG. 2C depicts a breath analysis system having the sample cartridge of FIG. 2B attached to an analysis device;
  • FIG. 2D depicts the breath analysis system in a configuration corresponding to an analysis of the breath sample;
  • FIG. 2E depicts the breath analysis system having a graphical output
  • FIG. 3 depicts a functional diagram of an analysis device
  • FIG. 4 depicts an illustrative sample capture module of the analysis device
  • FIG. 5 depicts an illustrative mixing module of the analysis device
  • FIG. 6 depicts another embodiment of a mixing module of the analysis device
  • FIG. 7 depicts an illustrative injection module of the analysis device
  • FIG. 8 depicts an illustrative detection module of the analysis device
  • FIG. 9A depicts a first configuration of a control value of the detection module
  • FIG. 9B depicts a second configuration of a control value of the detection module
  • FIG. 9C depicts a third configuration of a control value of the detection module
  • FIG. 10A depicts a detection assembly of the detection module
  • FIG. 10B depicts a brightness-time curve for detecting aldehydes
  • FIG. 10C depicts another embodiment of a detection assembly
  • FIG. 10D depicts a cross-sectional view of the detection assembly of FIG. 10C, taken along section A' - A' of FIG. 10C;
  • FIG. 1 1 depicts a sample piping and instrument diagram for the analysis device
  • FIG. 12A depicts a flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG.
  • FIG. 12B depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
  • FIG. 1 1
  • FIG. 12C depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1
  • FIG. 12D depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1
  • FIG. 12E depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
  • FIG. 1 1
  • FIG. 12F depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
  • FIG. 1 1 [0037] FIG. 12G depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1 ;
  • FIG. 12H depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1 ;
  • FIG. 12I depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
  • FIG. 1 1
  • FIG. 13A depicts another embodiment of a sample piping and instrument diagram for the analysis device
  • FIG. 13B depicts the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 13A indicating component grouping by manifold
  • FIG. 14 depicts a flow diagram for determining an aldehyde content of multiple breath samples
  • FIG. 15 depicts an analysis device having an enclosure and a display
  • FIG. 16 depicts an exploded view of the analysis device and a reagent container
  • FIG. 17 depicts an illustrative connection between the analysis device and the reagent container of FIG. 16;
  • FIG. 18 depicts a cross-sectional view of the analysis device of FIG. 15, taken along section A-A of FIG 15;
  • FIG. 19 depicts a functional block diagram of a system including an analysis device
  • FIG. 20 depicts another embodiment of a breath analysis system having a reagent container
  • FIG. 21 A depicts an exploded view of the breath analysis system of FIG. 20;
  • FIG. 21 B depicts a back plate of the reagent container of FIG. 21 A removed from the analysis device
  • FIG. 22A depicts a simplified cross-sectional view of a reagent container, taken along section B-B of FIG. 21 B;
  • FIG. 22B depicts a simplified cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a reagent container
  • FIG. 23A depicts a back plate of a regent container
  • FIG. 23B depicts the reagent container of FIG. 23A having an exposed internal chamber;
  • FIG. 24A depicts an exploded view of a reagent container;
  • FIG. 24B depicts an exploded view of the reagent container of FIG. 24A having a first sealing layer
  • FIG. 24C depicts an exploded view of the reagent container of FIG. 24B having a second sealing layer
  • FIG. 25A depicts a cross-sectional view of the reagent container of FIG. 24C, taken along section C-C of FIG. 24C;
  • FIG. 25B depicts detail 1 -1 showing an enlarged view of a portion of the directional flow valve
  • FIG. 25C depicts the directional flow valve of FIG. 25B unseated by a conduit from an analysis device.
  • FIG. 26 depicts a flow diagram of a method for operating a reagent container with an analysis device.
  • cross-hatching or shading in the accompanying figures is generally provided to clarify the boundaries between adjacent elements and also to facilitate legibility of the figures. Accordingly, neither the presence nor the absence of cross-hatching or shading conveys or indicates any preference or requirement for particular materials, material properties, element proportions, element dimensions, commonalities of similarly illustrated elements, or any other characteristic, attribute, or property for any element illustrated in the accompanying figures.
  • Aldehydes may include substantially any organic chemical compound characterized by a common (functional) group CHO (carbon, hydrogen, oxygen) structure bonded to an aldehyde group.
  • Aldehydes may be detected and analyzed in breath (or other sample from a patient or user) to provide information on the general health and wellness of the patient. For example, a value (concentration or amount) of an aldehyde group having a particular characteristic, size, weight, or the like (such as an aldehyde designated by a C4, C5, C6, or the like) may be indicative of certain medical conditions or otherwise be used for medical diagnostics.
  • a breath sample may be a particular characteristic, size, weight, or the like (such as an aldehyde designated by a C4, C5, C6, or the like) may be indicative of certain medical conditions or otherwise be used for medical diagnostics.
  • a breath sample may be a particular characteristic, size, weight, or the like (such as an aldehyde designated by a C4, C5, C6, or the
  • Detection may thus involve separating the sample by distinct aldehyde groups, often through sophisticated, multi-step chemical processes that may hinder the adaptability and repeatability of such techniques.
  • the breath analysis system of the present disclosure may mitigate such hindrances, thereby allowing for repeated detection of aldehydes by untrained technicians or clinical personnel.
  • the amount and/or concentration of certain aldehydes within a breath sample may be used to diagnose certain health information about a patient or otherwise used in monitoring a patient’s health, including incidences of cancer, tumors, or other malignant tissue within the patient’s body.
  • embodiments are described herein that analyze a breath sample taken from a patient, other embodiments may analyze different gases or fluids.
  • an unattended high-pressure liquid chromatography (“HPLC”) process is integrated with an analysis device that converts a patient breath sample into a mobile (liquid) chromatography phase.
  • the HPLC process may separate aldehydes of the mobile chromatography phase, as described herein, and be coupled to a detector that measures a value of the aldehydes according to molecule size. This may allow for an integrated approach that substantially automates aldehyde detection from breath capture to aldehyde score.
  • aldehydes may be measured, separated, or otherwise determined or distinguished from one another by any suitable chemical property, including sizes, shapes, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicty, charge, polarity, and so on.
  • the breath analysis system may include various components that cooperate to capture a patient breath sample, elute aldehydes from the breath sample, and determine an aldehyde content, among other functions.
  • the breath analysis system includes a breath capture component, such as an inflatable bag.
  • a patient may exhale into the bag, causing the bag to inflate and retain a breath sample.
  • the bag may be attachable to a cartridge having a permeable membrane (e.g., a silica or other like material) positioned along an interior flow path.
  • An analysis device of the breath analysis system may be attached to the cartridge and used to pull or otherwise extract the breath sample through the permeable membrane (e.g., using a vacuum pump).
  • the permeable membrane may retain aldehydes as the breath sample is drawn from the breath capture component.
  • a container may be received by the analysis device and include one or more chemical compounds, reagents (e.g., methanol (“MeOH”), buffers, dyes, and/or other items that may facilitate manipulation of the retained aldehydes and detection by the analysis device.
  • reagents e.g., methanol (“MeOH”)
  • buffers e.g., buffers, dyes, and/or other items that may facilitate manipulation of the retained aldehydes and detection by the analysis device.
  • the analysis device may use a group of reagents from the container to determine an aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the analysis device may form an elution that captures the retained aldehydes of the permeable membrane. This may be used as an input to an HPLC process, described herein, that separates aldehydes according to molecule size.
  • the analysis device may also include a display configured to depict a graphical output corresponding to a detected value of the separated aldehydes.
  • the output of the analysis device may be coupled with another electronic device, including over a wireless or distributed network, to facilitate diagnoses of a medical condition based on the detected aldehydes.
  • the analysis device may include various different modules that cooperate to determine the aldehyde content of a breath sample.
  • Each module may be configured to execute one or more functions of a process (or separate processes) that converts the patient breath sample into a mobile (e.g., liquid) chromatography phase and detect aldehydes of the breath sample using an unattended HPLC process.
  • a sample capture module may elute retained aldehydes of the permeable membrane using one or more reagents from a reagent module, for example, such as by flushing the permeable membrane with MeOH 40% and/or other appropriate reagent or concentration.
  • a mixing module coupled with the sample capture module, may mix the eluted aldehydes with the same or different reagents of the reagent module to form the mobile chromatography phase. This may involve adding a catalyst, dye, calibrants, and so on to the elution and mixing with air agitation.
  • An injection module separated and parallel to the mixing module, may form a pressurized combination of a further reagent (e.g., including MeOH 10% - MeOH 100%) from the reagent module and a buffer used to control the concentration of reagent.
  • the mobile chromatography phase output by the mixing module may be directed into the flow path of the pressurized output of the injection module, thereby allowing the injection module to push or pump the mobile chromatography phase through a static or stationary
  • the analysis device may thus also include a detection module coupled with the mixing module and the injection module.
  • the detection module may include a stationary chromatography phase.
  • the stationary chromatography phase may be defined by a column having a high density silica structure.
  • the detection module may be configured to load the mobile chromatography phase in a sample loop coupled with an inlet of the column (e.g., using a control valve, including the multi-position, multi-port valve, described herein) and allow the pressurized output of the injection module to advance the mobile chromatography phase through the silica structure of the column.
  • the pressurized output of the injection module may have a concentration of reagent tuned to allow a particular size or designation of aldehyde through the column.
  • an initial concentration of the reagent may allow the smallest of the aldehyde groups to pass through the column; the concentration may be gradually increased (according to a predefined gradient ramp) to selectively allow increasing sizes of aldehyde groups to pass through.
  • each aldehyde group will travel through the column separately without any overlap; in other embodiments, some overlap between aldehyde groups may occur and posts-processing of brightness data (or other data related to aldehyde detection) may be used to separate aldehyde group members from one another.
  • the detection module of the analysis device may thus be configured to measure a value (quantity, amount, or the like) of the aldehyde cluster output from the column.
  • the value of aldehydes may be detected using a laser or other excitation source that fluoresces a dye attached to the aldehyde groups as each are emitted from the column.
  • a detector for example, may measure an increase in brightness of the output of the column to facilitate a determination of an aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • a processing unit of the analysis device (or of another electronic device) may correlate the detected increase in brightness with a particular aldehyde group size or designation using the gradient ramp produced by the injection module.
  • aldehyde groups having a particular size or designation may progress through the column at a rate according to the gradient ramp controlled by the injection module (e.g., C4 aldehyde may require x seconds to progress through the column, whereas C5 aldehyde may require x + y seconds, and so forth based on the gradient ramp).
  • the detection of fluoresced particles at the output of the column may be associated with the anticipated progression of certain aldehyde groups through the column, and thus used to determine a relative value of each aldehyde group in the breath sample.
  • the timing of aldehyde groups passing through the column may be used to determine what particular aldehydes are being detected, while the brightness of each such group may be used to determine an amount or concentration of aldehydes within each group.
  • embodiments may determine relative and/or absolute concentrations of aldehydes within a user’s breath sample.
  • the reagent module, breath capture module, mixing module, injection module, detection module, and so on may collectively represent a network of tubes, pumps, valves, sensors, and/or other mechanical components, instrumentation, and devices and so on that are used to perform the various functions of the modules described herein. As described herein, the modules may be self-contained and
  • the modules may be coupled to one another (e.g., within the analysis device) and use common components of the system (e.g., a given pump or valve may be used to perform functions of both the breath capture module and mixing module based on a configuration of the device, as one possibility).
  • a given pump or valve may be used to perform functions of both the breath capture module and mixing module based on a configuration of the device, as one possibility.
  • FIG. 1 depicts an analysis device 104, such as the analysis device generally discussed above and described in greater detail below.
  • the analysis device 104 may be configured to determine an aldehyde content of a breath sample.
  • the analysis device 104 may include an unattended HPLC process and one or more systems that capture and elute aldehydes of a breath sample and detect aldehydes according to molecule size once separated by the HPLC.
  • the analysis device 104 may include an enclosure 108 that forms an exterior surface of the analysis device 104.
  • the enclosure 108 may form a substantially flat or planar bottom with curved or contoured surfaces extending therefrom to define a drum or cylindrical shape. It will be appreciated, however, that the enclosure 108 may form substantially any appropriate shape to define an exterior surface that conceals some or all of the various mechanical systems described herein, and thus FIG. 1 presents one possibility of such shape.
  • the analysis device 104 may also include a display 1 12.
  • the display 1 12 may be at least partially positioned within the enclosure 108, such as being positioned at least partially within an opening defined in an exterior surface, and used to depict graphical objects corresponding to the determined aldehyde content or other information of the analysis device.
  • the graphical objects may indicate a status or configuration of the analysis device 104, such as an indication of the analysis device 104 drawing a breath sample, eluting a breath sample, detecting aldehydes, and so on. Additionally or alternatively, the graphical objects may output a score or metric associated with the detected aldehydes, such as a concentration or value of one aldehyde designation relative to another aldehyde designation.
  • the display 1 12 may be a touch-sensitive display or otherwise responsive to touch or proximity inputs along the exterior surface of the enclosure 108.
  • the graphical objects may prompt a user to take certain actions, such as transmitting detection results to another electronic device, providing alerts to medical personnel or other users, performing a device diagnostic, among other possibilities.
  • This may be facilitated by a wireless or hardwired connection between the analysis device 104 and another electronic device or communication network, as described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 18.
  • One or more openings may be defined by the enclosure 108 to facilitate receiving a breath sample and determining an aldehyde content using a group of reagents.
  • the enclosure may define an opening 1 16.
  • the opening 1 16 may be positioned along an exterior side surface of the analysis device 104.
  • the opening 1 16 may be configured to receive a breath sample, such as along flow path F1 .
  • the opening 1 16 may be configured to receive at least a portion of a cartridge.
  • the cartridge may have a permeable membrane used to capture aldehydes contained within a breath sample from a user or patient.
  • Breath may thus be drawn through the opening 1 16 and into an interior of the analysis device 104, for example, using a pump positioned within the enclosure 108.
  • the breath sample and retained aldehydes captured by the permeable membrane may be manipulated by various mechanical components, instruments, devices, chemical compounds, and so on concealed by the enclosure 108, in order to facilitate determination of the aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the enclosure 108 may also conceal a container or set of containers (not shown in FIG. 1 ) that collectively hold or serve as a temporary repository for chemical compounds, including reagents, buffers, dyes, and so on used by the analysis device 104 for aldehyde detection.
  • the container or set of containers may be removable components that hold a quantity or volume of reagents for analysis of multiple breath samples.
  • the analysis device 104 may be used to determine an aldehyde content for multiple different breath samples before replacing containers holding the reagents. This may be beneficial, for example, when the analysis device 104 is used in a clinical setting, or other environment where multiple patient samples are analyzed consecutively. As described in greater detail below with respect to FIG.
  • the enclosure 108 may include another opening that receives a container having internal chambers that are configured to hold individual ones of the reagents.
  • the internal chambers may each be fluidically coupled with a corresponding module or system of the analysis device 104 used to collectively determine the aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the analysis device 104 may include various pumps, tubes, sensors, and so forth, to selectively dispense reagents from the container and into an internal volume of the enclosure 108.
  • FIGs. 2A - 2E depict a breath analysis system 100, such as the breath analysis system generally discussed above and described in greater detail below.
  • FIGs. 2A - 2E depict various components of the breath analysis system 100 undergoing operations associated with aldehyde detection.
  • the breath analysis system 100 broadly includes components that capture breath (air) from a user or patient and determine an aldehyde content or score of the breath sample. As described in the illustrative examples of FIG. 2A - 2E, this may include at least a breath capture component 150, a cartridge 160, and the analysis device 104 described above with respect to FIG. 1 . Other components are possible and described herein, including a cartridge configured to hold or retain one or more reagents. It will also be appreciated that FIGs. 2A - 2E show one sample embodiment of breath capture and elution; other techniques and structures are possible and described herein, including embodiments where some or all of the breath capture component 150 or the cartridge 160 is included within the analysis device.
  • FIG. 2A depicts the breath analysis system 100 undergoing a processing step for inflating the breath capture component 150.
  • the breath capture component 150 may be substantially any structure having an internal volume configured to retain breath received from a user or patient.
  • the breath capture component 150 is an inflatable bag.
  • the bag may alternate or transition from a deflated state to an inflated state when air is received through an intake 152.
  • the intake 152 may be, form a component of, or couple with, a mouthpiece, through which a user may engage and exhale through to inflate the bag.
  • FIG. 2A shows a user 120 exhaling into the breath capture component 150 through intake 152.
  • the exhaling user 120 may propagate a breath sample substantially along flow path F2a.
  • the breath capture component 150 may inflate and retain the sample for subsequent analysis.
  • the breath capture component 150 may also include a check valve, regulator, stopper, cap, or other component to retain or temporarily seal breath within the internal volume.
  • a check valve for example, may allow a user to repeatedly exhale into internal volume of the breath capture component until the internal volume retains a sufficient quantity of air.
  • the bag may be substantially inflated when it receives at least 10 liters of air from a user. In other cases, more or less than 10 liters may be appropriate and may be tuned in order to deliver a breath sample to the analysis device 104 sufficient for detection of aldehydes.
  • FIG. 2B depicts the breath analysis system 100 undergoing a processing step for attaching the breath capture component 150 to the cartridge 160.
  • the cartridge 160 may include a permeable membrane 162 (shown in phantom) positioned along a flow path within the cartridge.
  • the permeable membrane 162 may be a silica bed or other appropriate structure that allows the breath sample to pass substantially unobstructed.
  • the silica bed may, however, operate to capture or retain aldehydes of the breath sample when the breath sample passes through the permeable membrane. As described in greater detail below, this may allow the aldehydes to be removed from the breath sample and used to form a mobile chromatography phase for subsequent detection of aldehyde content.
  • the cartridge 160 may include at least a first attachment region 164a and a second attachment region 164b.
  • the first attachment region 164a may be attached to the breath capture component 150, for example, such as to the intake 152.
  • the breath sample contained within the internal volume of the breath capture component 150 may flow into the cartridge at the first attachment region 164a.
  • At, near, or otherwise fluidically coupled to the attachment region 164 may be one or more check valves, regulators, or the like to prevent breath or other fluid from traversing into the breath capture component 150 from the cartridge 160.
  • the second attachment region 164b may be used to fluidically couple the cartridge 160 with the analysis device 104.
  • the breath sample may flow through or exit the cartridge 160 from the second attachment region 164b and into the analysis device 104.
  • the second attachment region 164b is shown in FIG. 2B as being opposite an elongated body of the cartridge 160; however, this is not required. In other cases, the second attachment region 164b may be positioned along a side or another end of the cartridge 160.
  • the permeable membrane 162 may generally be positioned between the first attachment region 164a and the second attachment region 164b, so that the breath sample may flow through the permeable membrane 162 as it flows from the first attachment region 164a to the second attachment region 162b.
  • the second attachment region 164b may include or otherwise be fluidically coupled with multiple inlet and/or outlet structures of the analysis device 104, such as, the structure may be used to pull air through the permeable membrane 162, elute aldehydes from the permeable membrane 162, purge or clean internal components of the analysis device 104, among other possibilities.
  • FIG. 2C depicts the breath analysis system 100 undergoing a processing step for attaching the cartridge 160 to the analysis device 104.
  • the cartridge 160 may be at least partially positioned in or received by the opening 1 16 defined along an exterior of the enclosure 108.
  • the second attachment region 164b of the cartridge 160 may be advanced into the opening 1 16 and fluidically coupled with one or more inlet and/or outlet structures of the analysis device 104.
  • the cartridge 160 may be fluidically coupled with the analysis device 104 using other openings or features in the analysis device 104, including being positioned fully within the enclosure 108, thereby concealing or partially concealing the cartridge 160 and/or the breath capture component 150.
  • the cartridge 160 may be attached to the analysis device 104 while having the breath capture component 150 attached to the first attachment region 164a. Alternatively, the cartridge 160 may be attached to the analysis device 104 in a configuration in which the first attachment region 164a may be substantially uncoupled from the breath capture component 150.
  • the display 1 12 may optionally indicate coupling of the cartridge 160 to the analysis device 104 and/or convey information to a user regarding a prompt or alert for initiation of aldehyde detection of the analysis device 104.
  • FIG. 2D depicts the breath analysis system 100 in a configuration corresponding to an initiation of aldehyde detection of the breath sample.
  • the analysis device 104 may initiate a process for detecting an aldehyde content of the breath sample upon coupling of the cartridge 160 (not shown in FIG. 2D) in the opening 1 16 or other component or feature of the analysis device 104. This may be initiated upon a user command or input (such as that received at the display 1 12), or may occur upon a detection of the cartridge 160 and the analysis device 104 (or after a delay, which may be programmable).
  • the analysis device 104 may pull the breath sample from the breath capture component 150 along a flow path F2b.
  • the flow path F2b may extend from the breath capture component 150, through the cartridge 160, and into the analysis device 104.
  • the analysis device 104 may include one or more vacuum pumps, or other biasing elements, that draw the breath along the flow path F2b.
  • the flow path F2b may extend through the permeable membrane 162 (not shown in FIG. 2D) that is positioned within the cartridge 160. As the analysis device 104 draws the breath sample along the flow path F2b, aldehydes of the breath sample may be trapped, captured, or otherwise retained by the permeable membrane 162.
  • the captured aldehydes may be representative of the quantity of aldehydes in the breath sample.
  • the retained aldehydes may be eluted and analyzed in order to determine an aldehyde content of the breath sample, according to the various techniques described herein.
  • FIG. 2D also shows the display 1 12 having a graphical output 1 15.
  • the graphical output 1 15 may correspond to the configuration of the analysis device 104, such as a configuration in which air is drawn through the permeable membrane 162.
  • the graphical output 1 15 may thus be updatable to convey information associated with other
  • configurations or operations of the analysis device 104 such as configurations associated with eluting retained aldehydes from the permeable membrane 162, mixing the elution with reagents, including catalysts and dyes, performing an HPLC process, among other configurations.
  • FIG. 2E depicts the breath analysis system 100 upon completion of aldehyde detection of the breath sample.
  • the analysis device 104 may perform various different operations to detect the aldehyde content of the breath sample, described below with respect to FIGs. 3 - 14. This may include, among other operations, forming a mobile chromatography phase from an elution of retained aldehydes, performing an HPLC process, and determining an aldehyde content based on the fluorescence of separated particles.
  • Each of these and other processes of the analysis device 104 may be integrated and streamlined, requiring little, if any, input from a user.
  • the analysis device 104 may convey information to the user corresponding to the aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the display 1 12 may include a graphical output 1 15 that may include one or more symbols, pictures, glyphs, numbers, or the like that represent information concerning the aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the graphical output 1 15 may be a chart (such as a circular or pie chart) having bars or areas corresponding to a value (quantity) of certain aldehyde groups of a given size or designation relative to other aldehyde groups.
  • the graphical output 1 15 may have an individual area corresponding to a relative value of each of the aldehydes designated C4 - C10. This may allow a user to readily understand the quantity of a particular aldehyde, and discern information relating to the oxidative stress present in the breath sample, for example, by reference to the relative quantities of other aldehydes.
  • the graphical output 1 15 may also include an aldehyde score or metric, which may be a composite or derived output based on the relative quantities of the distinct aldehydes detected by the analysis device 104.
  • the cartridge 160 (and associated breath capture component 150) is shown attached to the analysis device 104. Subsequent to (or during) the detection of aldehydes by the analysis device 104, the cartridge 160 may be removed from the analysis device 104. In this regard, the analysis device 104 may be further configured to receive another cartridge (having another associated breath capture component) for analysis of further breath samples. For example, in a configuration, internal components of the analysis device 104 may be sanitized, purged, primed and so on in order to detect aldehydes in additional breath samples. Thus, the analysis device 104 may be configured for repeated detection of aldehydes for multiple breath samples, thereby enhancing the adaptability of the analysis device 104 in clinical settings. For example, the analysis device 104, and breath analysis system 100 more generally, may be used in a clinical setting in which breath samples from multiple patients are analyzed for aldehyde content with little to no input from a trained operator.
  • FIG. 3 depicts a functional diagram of an analysis device 300.
  • the analysis device 300 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 104 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 2E. Accordingly, the analysis device 300 may be configured to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample. For example, the analysis device 300 may form a mobile chromatography phase having aldehydes captured from a patient breath sample. The aldehydes may be separated through an HPLC process and subsequently detected by molecule size using a detection assembly.
  • the analysis device 300 may include various modules or collections of mechanical components, instruments, and so on that collectively operate to perform the functions described herein.
  • the analysis device 300 may include at least a reagent module 310, a sample capture module 320, a mixing module 330, an injection module 340, and a detection module 350.
  • the modules may use common or overlapping components and instruments to perform the functions herein.
  • a given pump, value, or other element may be used to perform a function of the sample capture module 320 in a first configuration, a function of the mixing module 330 in a second configuration, a function of the detection module 350 in a third configuration, and so forth.
  • the individual modules discussed with respect to FIG. 3 are used to facilitate an understanding of the analysis device 300, and are not meant as limiting or demarcating specific mechanical components or instruments as performing an isolated function.
  • the compounds described below with respect to FIGs. 4 - 121 are presented as one possible implementation of the modules described with respect to FIG. 3, and are not meant as limiting.
  • the reagent module 310 may include some or all of the chemical compounds used by the analysis device 300 for detection of the aldehyde content of a breath sample.
  • the reagent container may include MeOH 40%, MeOH 100%, a buffer, a calibrant, a catalyst, a dye, and/or other chemical compounds that may be selectively used by various other modules of the analysis device 300 in order to facilitate aldehyde detection of the breath sample.
  • the reagent module 310 may include a quantity of each of these, or other chemical compounds sufficient for the analysis device 300 to detect aldehydes of multiple successive breath samples.
  • the reagent module 310 may be a removable component coupled within the analysis device 300, it may be used across multiple analyses of the analysis device 300.
  • the reagent module 310 may also include various other components that may facilitate aldehyde detection of the analysis device 300, including one or more filters (for filtered air intake) and a waste receptacle, among other components and features. These too may be used for multiple successive breath sample analyses and may be tuned or calibrated according to a limiting quantity of one or more of the chemical compounds. For example, the waste receptacle may be substantially full when one or more of the chemical compounds is substantially consumed by a predetermined amount of breath sample analyses.
  • the reagent module 310 may be fluidically coupled with each of the other modules of the analysis device 300. As shown in the non-limiting example of FIG. 3, the reagent module 310 may be fluidically coupled with each of the sample capture module 320, the mixing module 330, the injection module 340, and the detection module 350.
  • an illustrative reagent path 31 1 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the sample capture module 320
  • an illustrative reagent path 312 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the mixing module 330
  • an illustrative reagent path 313 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the injection module 340
  • an illustrative reagent path 314 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the detection module 350.
  • the illustrative reagent paths are shown to generally depict fluidic coupling.
  • Each of the reagent paths may include connections for multiple different chemical compounds (or air intake exhaust, etc.) to and/or from the respective modules and which may operate at different times based on a given configuration of the analysis device 300.
  • each of the modules described herein may include, or be fluidically coupled with, pumps, valves, instruments, and so on that may selectively dispense chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 when used to facilitate the performance of a particular operation of the analysis device 300.
  • FIG. 3 also shows the sample capture module 320.
  • the sample capture module 320 may be used to capture aldehydes from a breath sample (e.g., on a silica bed) and elute the captured aldehydes. The elution may be transferred to the mixing module 330, as described below, to form a mobile chromatography phase having aldehydes from the breath sample.
  • the sample capture module 320 may receive a breath sample at flow 321 .
  • the flow 321 may be received from, for example, a breath capture component (breath capture component 150 of FIG. 2A) or other device (or the patient) and contain aldehydes.
  • the sample capture module 320 may initiate the flow 321 using a vacuum pump or other biasing component that draws the breath sample through a permeable membrane (silica bed). Accordingly, the sample capture module 320 may output the breath sample at flow 322.
  • the breath sample When the breath sample exits the sample capture module 320 at the flow 322, it may be free of a representative sample of aldehydes (including free of substantially all aldehydes), for example, which may have been captured by the permeable membrane of the sample capture module 320.
  • the sample capture module 320 may be further configured to form an elution having the aldehydes captured by the permeable membrane.
  • the sample capture module 320 may initiate a flow of reagents or other chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 (e.g. , using the reagent path 31 1 ) that elutes the permeable membrane.
  • a MeOH 40% reagent may be used to substantially dissolve the reagents (or a representative sample thereof) from the permeable membrane in order to form an elution (liquid) containing aldehydes of the breath sample.
  • This elution having the aldehydes of the breath sample may be output to the mixing module 330 at flow 323.
  • the mixing module 330 may be configured to receive the elution at flow 323 and form a mobile (liquid) chromatography phase. Broadly, to facilitate the foregoing, the mixing module 330 may obtain multiple, different chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 along the reagent path 312. This may include, without limitation, a calibrant, a catalyst, and a dye.
  • the calibrant may be a standardized solution having a known aldehyde content of a particular molecule size or designation. This known aldehyde content may be used as a baseline or reference point for determining the relative aldehyde content of other particular aldehyde groups of designations contained within the breath sample.
  • the catalyst may be used to facilitate a chemical reaction that forms the mobile chromatography phase from the elution and other chemical compounds from the reagent module 310.
  • the dye may be a fluorescent compound responsive to radiation, such as from a laser.
  • the dye may attach to aldehydes within the mixing module 330 and used as an indicator (marker) of a presence of aldehydes once separated within the detection module 350.
  • Each of the foregoing chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 may be mixed with the elution within a mixing volume of the mixing module 330, described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 5 and 6.
  • the chemical compounds may be added to the elution in any appropriate manner, including sequentially or in combination, and may be added prior to or during the filling of the mixing volume with the elution.
  • the mixing module 330 may mix the elution with the chemical compounds using air agitation or bubbles that percolate through the contents of the mixing volume. The bubbles may be drawn from the atmosphere through a filter of the reagent module 310.
  • the mixing module 330 may initiate air flow along one or both of the reagent paths 31 1 or 312 that draws air through a filter contained within the reagent module 310 and into the mixing volume.
  • the filter may be a separate component of the analysis device 300 and need not necessarily be associated with the reagent module 310.
  • the filter may be optional.
  • the elution and chemical compounds may be mixed by other techniques, including mechanical agitation, thermal mixing, among other techniques.
  • the mixing module 330 is configured to output the mobile chromatography phase formed within the mixing volume at flow path 324. As described below, the mobile chromatography phase of the flow path 324 is advanced through the detection module 350 by an output of the injection module 340, whereat the aldehyde content may be detected using the HPLC and optical detection.
  • the injection module 340 may therefore be configured to form a pressurized flow that is used to advance the mobile chromatography phase through the detection module 350.
  • the pressurized flow may include at least a reagent and a buffer received from the reagent module 310 along the reagent path 313.
  • the buffer may control a concentration of the reagent, which may be variable based on a predefined gradient ramp. For example, and as described in greater detail below, the concentration of the reagent may increase as the mobile chromatography phase is advanced through the detection module. This increase in concentration may allow for progressively larger aldehyde molecules to propagate through a column or other separation instrument or structure of the detection module 350, effectively separating the aldehydes of the mobile chromatography phase by molecule size.
  • the injection module 340 may include two high pressure pumps, operating in parallel, that each draw a respective one of the reagent and the buffer from the reagent module 310.
  • the output of each of such parallel high pressure pumps may be combined at a static mixing tee and output to the detection module 350 along flow 325.
  • the reagent and buffer may be combined according to selectively controlled ratios before a single high pressure pump that produces the flow 325.
  • the injection module 340 may also be configured to monitor a status of the high pressure pumps (e.g., using an in line flow meter, or other instrument) in order to detect a cavitation of depressurization event.
  • the analysis device 300 may trigger a diagnostic or other configuration to prime the pumps or otherwise repressurize the flow 325.
  • the detection module 350 may use the flow 324 from the mixing module 330 and the flow 325 from the injection module 340 to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample.
  • the detection module 350 may be configured to load a sample loop with the mobile chromatography phase output from the mixing module 330 at the flow 324.
  • one or more pumps may draw the mobile chromatography solution from the mixing volume into a sample loop.
  • the sample loop may be fluidically coupled with a control valve, such as a multi-position, multi-port value, described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 8- 9C.
  • the detection module 350 may be configured to rotate or reposition the sample loop (using the control valve) in order to fluidically couple the sample loop with the pressurized output of the injection module 340 using the flow 325.
  • the detection module 350 may be configured to separate aldehydes of the mobile
  • the detection module 350 may include a column or other separation structure or device having a high-density silica bed (stationary chromatography phase).
  • the high-density silica bed may generally impede the propagation of aldehydes therethrough.
  • the mobile chromatography phase may be advanced through the column and separated according to molecule size or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, and so on).
  • the advancement of aldehydes through the column may at least partially depend on the chemical composition of the pressurized output of the injection module 340.
  • the pressurized output of the injection module 340 may include a reagent having a concentration controlled by a buffer and an initial reagent concentration that allows the smallest of the aldehyde groups of designations to progress through the column.
  • This concentration may correspond to a concentration of reagent used to elute the aldehydes from the permeable membrane (e.g., MeOH 40%); however, other concentrations and reagents may be used.
  • the concentration of the reagent may be increased over time according to a gradient ramp (e.g., by dynamically altering a
  • the gradient ramp may be a curve that defines the concentration of the reagent over a duration of the HPLC process. Generally, this concentration increases at a rate that allows the concentration of the reagent to progress from the initial MeOH 40% to a final concentration of at or near MeOH 100%. The rate, however, may be variable or otherwise non-constant as may be appropriate to facilitate the separation of aldehydes within the column. And as the concentration of reagent increases, progressively larger aldehydes may propagate through the column.
  • Aldehyde groups of certain sizes or designation may thus pass through the column in groups (slugs, clusters, etc.) when the concentration of reagent in the pressurized output of the injection module reaches a designated value.
  • the gradient ramp may be controlled to allow the various aldehyde groups to pass through the column separated from one another (in bands) to aid in detection of relative aldehyde content at an output of the column.
  • a processing unit of the analysis device 300 may associate the detected aldehydes with a certain aldehyde designation (e.g., C4, C5, C6, etc.) based on an anticipated propagation time of the aldehyde group through the column, as determined by the gradient ramp and increasing concentration of reagent in the pressurized output from the injection module 340.
  • a certain aldehyde designation e.g., C4, C5, C6, etc.
  • the detection module may be configured to measure an output of the column to detect aldehydes.
  • the detection module may be configured to optically detect aldehydes.
  • the output of the column may be hit by an excitation source (such as radiation from a laser).
  • the fluorescent may be attached to a phosphorescent dye.
  • the detection module 350 may therefore be configured to detect an increase in brightness of the output of the column.
  • the output of the column may extend between the excitation source (laser) and a detector.
  • the detector may include, or be coupled with, a band-pass or other filter, thereby allowing the detector to register an optical signal in response to fluorescence of the dye.
  • the optical signal may correspond to a value of the increase in brightness, and thus be used to determine a relative quantity of a detected aldehyde (e.g., by comparing a brightness value for a given aldehyde group with other brightness values for other aldehyde groups.
  • This signal from the detector may thus be processed to determine the foregoing and communicate to a user a determined aldehyde content of the breath sample (e.g., using one or more graphical outputs of a display).
  • some embodiments may employ different modes of detection and/or separation of aldehydes, including other chemical or physical properties, such as size, shape, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, charge, polarity, and so on.
  • the detection module 350 may also be fluidically coupled with the reagent module 310, for example, through reagent path 314.
  • the detection module 350 may output a waste stream to the reagent module 310. This may include the mobile chromatography phase output from the column, along with any other chemical compounds or gasses that result from the operation of the detection module 350.
  • FIG. 4 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the sample capture module 320.
  • the various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 4 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the sample capture module 320 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 4 is intended to cover alternatives, modifications, and equivalents of the sample capture module 320 consistent with the teachings herein.
  • FIG. 4 shows a breath capture component 404.
  • the breath capture component 404 may be substantially analogous to the breath capture component 150 described above with respect to FIGs. 2A - 2E. As such, the breath capture component 404 may be configured to hold a breath sample.
  • the breath capture component 404 may be coupled with a cartridge 408.
  • the cartridge 408 may be substantially analogous to the cartridge 160 described above with respect to FIGs. 2A - 2E.
  • the cartridge 408 may include a permeable membrane 412 positioned along an internal flow path.
  • the permeable membrane 412 may be a silica bed configured to retain aldehydes when the breath sample passes through the cartridge 408.
  • a directional valve 410 (check valve, regulator, or the like) may be positioned along a flow path between the breath capture component 404 and the cartridge 408.
  • the directional valve 410 may substantially prevent flow into the breath capture component 404, including the flow of reagents, solvents, and/or other chemical compounds that may be used to flush or propagate through the cartridge 408 subsequent to aldehyde capture.
  • a multi-position valve 414 (three-way value) may be positioned along a flow path extending from an outlet of the cartridge 408. The multi-position valve 414 may be used to alternate a flow path at the outlet of the cartridge 408 between an exhaust (and associated drip pan) of the analysis device 300 and the mixing module 330.
  • the multi-position valve 414 may be configured to route flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 toward an exhaust 416.
  • flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 may be substantially blocked from proceeding to the mixing module 330.
  • the exhaust 416 may be open to atmosphere or otherwise to allow fluid (air) to exit the sample capture module 320.
  • the exhaust 416 may be coupled with or positioned near a pan 420.
  • the pan 420 may be a drip pan that is used to collect liquids emitted at the exhaust 416.
  • the pan 420 may collect, for example, water or other fluids, present in a breath sample.
  • a pump 424 may be used to draw the breath sample held within the breath capture component 404 through the cartridge 408 and toward the exhaust 416.
  • the pump 424 may be a vacuum pump or other suitable pump that may deflate the breath capture component 404 and pull the breath sample through the permeable membrane 412.
  • the pump 424 may have a variable flow rate controlled by the analysis device 300. In one embodiment, the pump 424 may have a flow rate of 3 L/min.; however, this may be adjusted up or down.
  • a flow instrument 428 may be fluidically coupled with the pump 424.
  • the flow instrument 428 may be an inline flow meter, but other instruments are possible as well, including a pressure gauge that detects a value associated with an output of the cartridge 408.
  • the flow instrument 428 may be used to monitor propagation of the breath sample through the permeable membrane 412, including flow rate.
  • the pump 424 may, in certain embodiments, operate at least partially based on an output or signal from the flow instrument 428. For example, when the flow instrument 428 detects a certain value (such as that corresponding to a substantial evacuation of the breath sample from the breath capture component 404), the pump 424 may cease operation. This may also cause the sample capture module 320 to initiate elution of aldehydes from the permeable membrane 412, as described herein.
  • the multi-position valve 414 may direct flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 to the mixing module 330 (not shown in FIG. 4) along flow path F4 which may be received by the mixing module 330. This may occur subsequent to the operation of the pump 424 that pulls the breath sample from the breath capture component 404 to the exhaust 416 (for aldehyde capture at the permeable membrane 412).
  • flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 may be substantially blocked from proceeding to the exhaust 416. Accordingly, this may allow the sample capture module 320 to propagate an elution to the mixing module 330 for further processing .
  • the sample capture module 320 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents from the reagent module 310 that may facilitate in forming an elution.
  • the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and/or other compounds or structures. Shown in FIG. 4 are possible chemical compounds and filters that may be fluidically coupled with the sample capture module 320. It will be appreciated, however, that the sample capture module 320 may be fluidically coupled with more or fewer items of the reagent module 310. Further, reagent module 310 may include additional chemical compounds and structures, for example, such as those described below with respect to FIGs. 5 - 8.
  • the sample capture module 320 is fluidically coupled with a first sample capture reagent 432, a second sample capture reagent 436, and a sample capture filter 440.
  • the first sample capture reagent 432 may be MeOH 40%
  • the second sample capture reagent 436 may be MeOH 100%
  • the sample capture filter 440 may be an air filter, such as a carbon-based filter; however, other chemical compounds and structures are possible.
  • the first sample capture reagent 432 may be used to elute retained aldehydes from the permeable membrane 412.
  • the second sample capture reagent 436 may be used to clean or sanitize internal components of the sample capture module 320 (and other fluidically connected module), for example, which may occur between breath analyses.
  • the sample capture filter 440 may be used as an air intake for air agitation by the mixing module 330, air drying of internal components of the sample capture module 320, among other functions.
  • the sample capture module 320 may include a multi-position valve 450.
  • the multi-position valve 450 may be used to establish a flow of reagent into the sample capture module 320 that alternates between the first sample capture reagent 432 and the second sample capture reagent 436. For example, when the multi-position valve 450 is in a first configuration, the first sample capture reagent 432 may flow into the sample capture module 320. Conversely, when the multi-position valve 450 is in a second configuration, the second sample capture reagent 436 may flow into the sample capture module 320.
  • the pump 454 may be a fixed volume (displacement) pump that is configured to dispense a predefined volume of the respect reagents into the sample capture module 320 (e.g., as may be calibrated in micro liters).
  • the pump 454 may be fluidically coupled with the cartridge 412 using a multi-position valve 458.
  • the multi-position valve 458 may be configured to alternate an output of the pump 454 between a flow path that extends through the cartridge 408 (and through the permeable membrane 412) and another flow path that bypasses the cartridge 468 and proceeds to the exhaust 416 and/or the mixing module 330 (e.g., based on a configuration of the multi-position valve 414).
  • the pump 454 may also be used to draw air into the sample capture module 320. As shown in FIG. 4, the pump 454 may be fluidically coupled to the sample capture module 320 (and associated sample capture filter 440) using a multi-position valve 462. The multiposition valve 462 may be used to alternate an intake of the pump 454 between air from the sample capture filter 440 and one or both of the first sample capture reagent 432 and the second sample capture reagent 436. In this regard, when the multi-position valve 462 is in a first configuration, the pump 454 may operate to pump substantially liquid chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 and into the sample capture module 320.
  • the pump 454 may operate to pump substantially gaseous fluids (e.g., filtered air) from, or as filtered through, the reagent module 310 and into the sample capture module 320.
  • substantially gaseous fluids e.g., filtered air
  • the foregoing components and instruments may allow the sample capture module 320 to capture aldehydes from a breath sample, form an elution of the retained aldehydes, and clean or purge internal components of the sample capture module 320 or analysis device 300 more generally.
  • operation of the pump 424 may cause a breath sample held within the breath capture component 404 to progress through the directional valve 410, the cartridge 408 (and permeable membrane 412), multi-position valve 414, flow instrument 428, pump 424, and exhaust 416. This may allow the permeable membrane 412 to capture aldehydes from the breath sample.
  • operation of the pump 454 may cause the first sample capture reagent 432 to progress through the multi-position valve 450, the multiposition valve 462, the pump 454, the multi-position valve 458, the cartridge 408 (and permeable membrane 412), the multi-position valve 414, and along the flow path F4 toward the mixing module 330.
  • This may allow the sample capture module 320 to form an elution having the aldehydes of the breath sample that is delivered to the mixing module 330 for further processing into the mobile chromatography phase.
  • Other modes or operations are contemplated and described herein, for example, such as using the pump 454 to dispense the second sample capture reagent 436 for cleaning or sanitizing of the sample capture module 320, among other appropriate functions.
  • FIG. 5 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the mixing module 330.
  • the various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 5 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the mixing module 330 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 5 is intended to cover alternatives,
  • the mixing module 330 may be configured to form a mobile chromatography phase that contains aldehydes from a breath sample.
  • the mobile chromatography phase may be propagated through a stationary chromatography phase of the detection module 350, described herein, to detect an aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the mixing module 330 may receive the flow F4 from the sample capture module 320.
  • the flow F4 may include an elution having the aldehydes of the breath sample, as described above with respect to FIG. 4.
  • the elution may be advanced into a mixing volume 504 and mixed with one or more chemical compounds to form the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the mixing module 330 may be configured to advance air into the mixing volume 504 that agitates the elution and the one or more chemical compounds. Agitation from the air may mix the elution and the chemical compounds to form the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the mobile chromatography phase may be advanced out of the mixing module 330 along a flow path F5 to the detection module 350.
  • the mixing module 330 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents or other chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 that may facilitate in forming a mobile chromatography phase from the elution.
  • the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and/or other compounds or structures. Shown in FIG. 5 are possible chemical compounds and filters that may be fluidically coupled with the mixing module 330.
  • mixing module 330 may be fluidically coupled with more or fewer items of the reagent module 310.
  • reagent module 310 may include additional chemical compounds and structures, for example, such as those described herein with respect to FIGs. 4 and 6 - 8.
  • the mixing module 330 is fluidically coupled with a first mixing reagent 550, a second mixing reagent 554, a third mixing reagent 558, a first mixing filter 562, and a second mixing filter 566.
  • the first mixing reagent 550 may be an internal standard or calibrant (having a known or predetermined aldehyde content)
  • the second mixing reagent 554 may be a catalyst
  • the third mixing reagent 558 may be a dye (such as a fluorescent dye)
  • the first and second mixing filters 562, 566 may be air filters, such as a carbon-based filters; however, other chemical compounds and structures are possible.
  • the first mixing reagent 550 may include a known value of aldehydes.
  • the second mixing reagent 554 may be used to initiate or accelerate a chemical reaction that forms the mobile chromatography phase from the elution.
  • the third mixing reagent 558 may bond or attach to aldehydes within the elution.
  • the dye may be responsive to radiation (e.g., such as increasing in brightness), thereby allowing for optical detection of aldehydes.
  • the first mixing filter 562 may be used as an air intake for air agitation by the mixing volume 504.
  • the second mixing filter 562 may be used as air intake for the mixing volume 504, for example, when the mobile chromatography phase is drawn from the mixing volume and along the flow path F5, among other functions.
  • One or more valves, pumps, and/or other components or instruments of the mixing module 330 may operate to selectively dispense the chemical compounds from the reagent module 310.
  • the mixing module 330 may include a first mixing pump 508.
  • the first mixing pump 508 may be configured to dispense the first mixing reagent 550 into a flow that propagates into the mixing volume 504.
  • the mixing module 330 may further include a second mixing pump 512.
  • the second mixing pump 512 may be configured to dispense the second mixing reagent 554 into a flow that propagates into the mixing volume 504.
  • the mixing module 330 may further include a third mixing pump 516.
  • the third mixing pump 516 may be configured to dispense the third mixing reagent 558 into a flow that propagates into the mixing volume 504.
  • the first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and the third mixing pump 516 may each be fixed volume (displacement) pumps configured to dispense a certain and controlled quantity of the respective mixing reagents into the elution. Other types of pumps may be used, including other fixed volume pumps, or pumps that may allow a predefined volume of fluid to pass for a given pump stroke or cycle. As shown in FIG. 5, the first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and the third mixing pump 516 may introduce the respective mixing reagents into a flow of the elution as it propagates into the mixing volume 504.
  • mixing reagents may be introduced into the mixing volume 504 along a separate path from that of the elution.
  • mixing reagents and the elution may be introduced into the mixing volume 504 separately, including through distinct openings in the mixing volume 504, in other embodiments.
  • Each of the first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and the third mixing pump 516 may dispense a corresponding one of the mixing reagents independent from one another.
  • the pumps may be tuned to control a flow rate of the mixing reagents into the elution, according to various parameters of the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the first mixing pump 508 may be calibrated to dispense 45 microliters of the first mixing reagent 550 into the elution as it flows toward the mixing volume 504.
  • the second mixing pump 512 may be calibrated to dispense 45 microliters of the second mixing reagent 554 into the elution as it flows toward the mixing volume 504.
  • the third mixing pump 516 may be calibrated to dispense 150 microliters of the third mixing reagent 558 into the elution as it flows toward the mixing volume 504. In other cases, more or less of the first mixing reagent 550, the second mixing reagent 554, and the third mixing reagent 558 may be added to the elution as may be appropriate to form the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the mixing module 330 may also include a fourth mixing pump 520.
  • the fourth mixing pump 520 may be used to advance air into the mixing volume 504 for air agitation.
  • the fourth mixing pump 520 may be configured to draw air from atmosphere (and through the fluidically coupled first filter 562 of the reagent module 310) and direct the air toward the mixing volume 504.
  • the air may bubble, percolate, or otherwise flow through the liquid solution held within the mixing volume 504. This may agitate or mix the liquids to facilitate formation of the mobile chromatography phase within the mixing volume 504.
  • the foregoing components and instruments may facilitate operation of the mixing module 330 to receive an elution and mixing reagents, mixing the elution and mixing reagents, and flow a mobile chromatography phase formed from the elution and the reagents toward the detection module 350.
  • a gas sensor 524 bubble detector
  • This may initiate mixing reagent flow from one or more of the first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and/or the third mixing pump 516, thereby allowing the first mixing reagent 550, the second mixing reagent 554, the third mixing reagent 558, and the elution to flow into the mixing volume 504.
  • the fourth mixing pump 520 may initiate a flow of air in the mixing volume 504, thereby causing air agitation within the mixing volume 504 that is used to form the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the mixing volume 504 may be fluidically coupled with a multiposition valve 528.
  • FIG. 6 depicts another embodiment of the mixing module 330 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 and 5.
  • FIG. 6 shows the mixing module 330 having a mixing volume 604.
  • the mixing volume 604 may be substantially analogous to the mixing volume 504 described above with respect to FIG. 5.
  • the mixing module 604 may be configured to receive multiple mixing reagents and an elution (containing aldehydes) and form a mobile chromatography phase.
  • the mixing volume 604 may be defined by angled sidewalls 674.
  • the angled sidewalls 674 may extend away from a mixing opening 675 positioned at the bottom of the mixing volume 604. Accordingly, the angled sidewalls 674 may define a cone or contoured shape that expands outward from a bottommost portion of the mixing volume 604.
  • the angled sidewalls 674 that define the cone may facilitate mixing or air agitation.
  • FIG. 6 shows the mixing volume 604 in a configuration in which a solution 680 is contained therein.
  • the solution 680 may be some combination of mixing reagents and elution that are combined to form the mobile chromatography phase.
  • Air 682 (or other gas) may be introduced into the mixing volume 604 (from a flow path F6) through the mixing opening 675 and allowed to flow or percolate through the solution 680. In some cases, at least a portion of the air 682 may flow along the angled sidewalls 674, which may facilitate air agitation of the solution 680.
  • FIG. 6 also depicts the mixing volume 604 fluidically coupled with one or more structures of the reagent module 310.
  • the reagent module 310 is shown as having a mixing filter 660 and a receptacle 670.
  • the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds and structures.
  • structures in the reagent module 310 depicted in FIG. 6 are shown to illustrate one or more functions of mixing volume 604 and are not meant as limiting.
  • the mixing filter 660 may be an air filter fluidically coupled with the mixing volume 604 using a direction valve 662.
  • the mixing filter 660 may be used to filter atmospheric air that may be drawn into the mixing volume 604 during one or more operations of the mixing module 330 (e.g., evacuating the mixing volume 604).
  • the direction valve 662 may be a check valve or regulator that substantially prevents backflow or flow into the filter 660 from the mixing volume 604.
  • the receptacle 670 may be a container, bin, vessel, or the like that captures an output of the mixing module 330, or the analysis device 300 more generally.
  • FIG. 7 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the injection module 340.
  • the various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 7 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the injection module 340 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 7 is intended to cover alternatives,
  • the injection module 340 may be configured to form a pressurized combination of an injection reagent and a buffer.
  • the pressurized combination may be output to the detection module 350 along a flow path F7.
  • a concentration of the injection reagent may be tunable based on a flow rate of one or both of the injection reagent and the buffer as pumped along a direction toward the flow path F7.
  • This concentration of the injection reagent may at least partially control the separation of the various distinct aldehydes groups of designations (e.g., C4, C5, C6, and so on), as described herein.
  • the injection module 340 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents from the reagent module 310 that may facilitate forming a pressurized combination for use with the detection module 350.
  • the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and/or other compounds or structures. Shown in FIG. 7 are possible chemical compounds and filters that may be fluidically coupled with the injection module 340. It will be appreciated, however, the mixing module 330 may be fluidically coupled with more or fewer items of the reagent module 310. Further, reagent module 310 may include additional chemical compounds and structures, for example, such as those described herein with respect to FIGs. 4 - 6 and 8.
  • the injection module 340 is fluidically coupled with a first injection reagent 750, and a second injection reagent 754.
  • the first injection reagent 750 may be a reagent, such as MeOH 100% and the second injection reagent 754 may be a buffer.
  • the concentration of the first injection reagent 750 may be reduced or otherwise controlled by the second injection reagent 754, as described herein (e.g., such as reducing MeOH concentration from 100% to 40%, or lower, based on the buffer).
  • One or more valves, pumps, and/or other components or instruments of the injection module 340 may operate to selectively dispense the chemical compounds from the reagent module 310.
  • the injection module 340 may include a first injection pump 708.
  • the first injection pump 708 may be configured to dispense the first injection reagent 750 into a flow that propagates along the flow path F7.
  • the injection module 340 may further include a second injection pump 712.
  • the second injection pump 712 may be configured to dispense the second injection reagent 754 into a flow that propagates along the flow path F7.
  • Both of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may be substantially high pressure pumps configured to increase pressure within (pressurize) and input flow.
  • both of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may output flow at 2,000 pounds-per-square inch (psi). In other cases, the output may be more or less than 2,000 psi (including as high as 10,000 psi, or higher) and which may be variable based on a configuration of the analysis device 300. Further, it will be appreciated that the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may operate to produce output having different pressures and/or different flow rates, as may be appropriate to produce the gradient ramp, described herein.
  • the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 may combine at a static mixing tee 716.
  • the static mixing tee 716 may include an interior feature that facilitates blending of the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 (e.g., including an internal protrusion); however, this is not required.
  • the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 may exit the static mixing tee 716 as a substantially combined flow that forms the pressurized combination output along the flow path F7.
  • a flow instrument 728 may detect a flow rate of the pressurized combination output from the static mixing tee 716, or more generally, from the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712.
  • An output or signal of the flow instrument 728 may be transmitted to a processing unit of the analysis device 300 (or of another electronic device). This signal may be used to control or regulate one or more functions of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712, such as adjusting a flow rate and/or pressurized output in order to maintain a desired output along the flow path F7.
  • the flow instrument 728 may also be used to detect a depressurization event of the injection module 340.
  • the analysis device 300 may transition into a configuration that primes or otherwise allows for fluid flow through the pumps.
  • the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may cooperate to form a pressurized combination having a concentration of reagent along a gradient ramp.
  • one or both of the flow rate (or other characteristic) of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may be modified in order to gradually increase a concentration of the reagent in the pressurized combination over time.
  • first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 are shown in FIG. 7 as being mixed or combined after pumping, in other cases the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 may be combined with one another before pumping.
  • a single pump may be used to pressurize the combination of the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 for transfer to the detection module 350.
  • FIG. 8 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the detection module 350.
  • the various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 8 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the detection module 350 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 8 is intended to cover alternatives, modifications, and equivalents of the detection module 350 consistent with the teaching herein.
  • the detection module 350 may be configured to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample.
  • the detection module 350 may be configured to propagate a mobile (liquid) chromatography phase (containing aldehydes from the breath sample) through a stationary chromatography phase (high-density silica) in order to separate the aldehydes by molecule or group size or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, and so on).
  • the detection module 350 may also be configured to detect a value for each of the separated aldehydes using an excitation source (laser) to fluoresce dye attached to the aldehydes.
  • laser excitation source
  • the detection module 350 may include a control valve 804.
  • the control valve 804 may be configured to direct a mobile chromatography phase (e.g., from the mixing module 330) into a flow of a pressurized combination (e.g., from the injection module 340) that may operate to advance the mobile chromatography phase through the stationary chromatography phase.
  • the control valve 804 as described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 9A - 9C, may include multiple ports (such as seven ports shown in FIG. 8). Particular ones of the multiple ports may be fluidically coupled to one another based on a configuration or position of the control valve 804.
  • control valve 804 may allow for operation of the control valve 804 in a first configuration to receive a volume of the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the control valve 804 may allow the volume of the mobile chromatography phase to be directed into a flow path of a pressured combination of flow that advances the mobile chromatography phase toward a column or other structure of an HPLC process.
  • the control valve 804 may allow one or more fluid flows (e.g., such as the pressurized combination) to flow to waste, for example, as may be used to facilitate priming cavitated pumps of the injection module 340.
  • control valve 804 described herein may be a seven-port, three-configuration valve, other valves may be used to implement the functions of the detection module 350 described herein, including a six-port, two-configuration valve, or other appropriate valve that may route an output of the mixing module to an output of the injection module.
  • the control valve 804 may receive the mobile chromatography phase from the mixing module 330 along the flow path F5 at a port 1 .
  • the control valve 804 may be coupled with a sample loop 808 that is fluidically coupled with a port 3 and port 6 of the control valve 804.
  • the sample loop 808 may have an internal volume that is tunable to a desired volume of the mobile chromatography phase for separation by the HPLC process.
  • the sample loop 808 may have a volume of 800 microliters; however, in other cases the sample loop 808 may have a volume of more or less than 800 microliters.
  • the sample loop 808 may be filled with the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the detection module 350 may include a detection pump 812.
  • the detection pump 812 may be fluidically coupled to the control valve 804 at a port 2.
  • the detection pump 812 may thus cause the mobile chromatography phase to flow from the port 1 to the port 3, fill the sample loop 808, and from the port 6 to the port 2. Excess volume of the mobile chromatography phase may flow, in one embodiment, to the reagent module 310, such as to receptacle 890.
  • the receptacle 890 may be fluidically coupled to an output of the detection pump 812 and may be substantially analogous to the receptacle 670 described above with respect to FIG.
  • Fluidically coupled with the detection pump 812 may also be a gas sensor 816 (bubble detector).
  • the gas sensor 816 may be used to detect the presence of gas or liquid at an inlet (or outlet) of the detection pump 812.
  • the gas sensor 816 may be used to detect a filling status of the sample loop 808. For example, when the gas sensor 816 no longer detects gas, or detects a minimal amount, or drop in gas content, the sample loop 808 may be substantially filled with the mobile chromatography phase.
  • the gas sensor 816 may be used to initiate a change in configuration of the control valve 804 (e.g., to the second configuration of the detection module 350) where the mobile chromatography phase within the sample loop 808 is directed toward a separation column and into a flow of the pressured combination.
  • the control valve 804 may receive a pressurized combination of reagent and buffer at a port 5, such as along the flow path F7 from the injection module 340.
  • the port 5 may be fluidically coupled with the port 6 and the port 3 may be fluidically coupled with the port 4.
  • the pressurized combination received by the control valve 804 at the port 5 may advance the mobile chromatography phase out of the sample loop and toward a column 820.
  • the column 820 may define a stationary chromatography phase of the HPLC process.
  • the column 820 may include one or separation substrates 824 (such as one or more layers of high-density silica) or other appropriate material.
  • the separation substrates 824 may be permeable structures that impede advancement of aldehydes through the column 820.
  • the separation substrates 824 may permit advancement of aldehydes having a certain group or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, and so on) at least partially based on a flow pressure at an inlet of the column 820 and a concentration of reagent (e.g., the pressurized combination received at the port 5). Both the low pressure and the reagent concentration may be controlled by the injection module 340 described above with respect to FIG. 7, and thus the injection module 340 may be used to selectively advance certain aldehydes through the column at specified time intervals.
  • molecules of a given aldehyde group may be advanced through, and output from the column, clustered with molecules of other like aldehyde groups.
  • the cluster of molecules of like aldehyde groups may be separated from other, distinct aldehyde groups by a time interval as controlled by the injection module 340. Accordingly, aldehyde content may be measured at an output of the column and associated with a relative quantity of a particular aldehyde group.
  • the detection module 350 may include a detection assembly 828.
  • the detection assembly 828 as described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 10A and 10B, may be configured to detect aldehydes at an output of the column 820.
  • the detection assembly 828 may include an excitation source (laser) and an optical detector, not shown in FIG. 8.
  • the excitation source may expose the output of the column 820 to radiation, thus causing the dye attached to the aldehyde groups to fluoresce. This fluorescence may be detected by the detection assembly 828 and used to determine a relative value of a given aldehyde at the output of the column 820.
  • the optical detector may generally measure a brightness of one or more aldehydes or aldehyde groups, although other detectors may measure other physical or chemical characteristics.
  • the detection module 350 may also include a regulator 832.
  • the regulator 832 may be fluidically coupled to an output of the detection assembly 828.
  • the regulator 832 may be a pressure regulator that is configured to maintain a minimum pressure at the output of the detection assembly 828.
  • the regulator 832 may be a pressure regulator that allows flow therethrough when a threshold pressure is satisfied. The regulator 832 may thus prevent the output of the detection assembly 828 from venting directly to atmospheric pressure, which may help reduce gas formation with the detection assembly 828.
  • the control valve 804 also includes a port 7. In a third configuration of the detection module 350, the port 5 may be fluidically coupled with the port 7.
  • the control valve 804 may direct the pressurized combination of the flow F7 to the port 7 and toward the reagent module 310 (such as toward the receptacle 890).
  • This third configuration may be used to prime the injection pumps described above with respect to FIG. 7.
  • the control valve 804 may be operated in the third configuration. This may reduce static pressure at the output of the pumps (e.g., by venting the pumps to atmospheric or near atmospheric pressure), and thereby help prime the pumps with the appropriate reagent and pressurize the output.
  • the control valve 804 may return to one of the first configuration or the second configuration of the detection module 350, as may be appropriate for a given application.
  • FIGs. 9A - 9C depict various configurations of a control valve 904.
  • the control valve 904 may be substantially analogous to the control valve 804 described above with respect to FIG. 8.
  • the control valve 904 may be a multi-position, multi-port valve that is used to direct a mobile chromatography phase (e.g., from the mixing module 330) into a flow of a pressurized combination (e.g., from the injection module 340) that may operate to advance the mobile chromatography phase through a stationary chromatography phase.
  • control valve 904 may have seven ports. Particular ones of the seven ports may be fluidically coupled with one another based on a configuration or position of the control valve 904. In one embodiment, the control valve 904 may alternate or transition between the respective configurations or positions in order to, for example, redirect or transfer a defined volume of fluid from a first flow or process (e.g., a relatively low pressure flow) into a second flow or process (e.g., a relatively high pressure flow). For example, FIGs.
  • FIGS. 9A - 9C show a sample loop 908 having a defined volume that may be fluidically coupled with the control valve 904 in order to facilitate redirection or transfer of fluid between a relatively low pressure flow and a relatively high pressure flow.
  • the control valve 904 may be operated to allow the sample loop 908 to be filled in a first configuration using an output from a relatively low pressure flow and subsequently transferred in a second configuration to a relatively high pressure flow.
  • the control valve 904 may further be operated in other configurations, including bypassing the sample loop 908, as described herein.
  • a control valve 904 is shown.
  • the control valve 904 may be operated to load or fill the sample loop 908.
  • the sample loop 908 may be filled using a flow F9a received by the control valve 904 at a first port.
  • the flow F9a may include a chemical compound, solution, mobile chromatography phase, and so on, that is directed into the sample loop 908 when the control valve 904 is in the first configuration 900a.
  • the first port may be fluidically coupled with a sixth port of the control valve 904.
  • the sample loop 908 may be fluidically coupled to the sixth port and a third port of the control valve 904.
  • the control valve 904 when the control valve 904 is in the first configuration 900a, the flow F9a received at the first port may flow to the sixth port and fill the sample loop 908.
  • the third port may be fluidically coupled with a second port of the control valve 904.
  • the control valve 904 may output a flow F9b at the second port based on the sample loop 908 filling from the flow F9a received at the first port of the control valve 904.
  • the flow F9a may generally correspond to an output from a mixing module, such as the mixing module 330 described herein with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8.
  • the output of the mixing module 330 may be a mobile chromatography phase that contains aldehydes of a patient breath sample.
  • the output may be a substantially low pressure output.
  • the flow F9b may be fluidically coupled with a pump, such as the detection pump 812, described herein with respect to FIG. 8.
  • suction or biasing from the pump may cause or initiate flow of the mobile chromatography phase along F9a and through the first port, the sixth port, the third port, and the second port, thereby filling the sample loop 908 with the output of the mixing module 330.
  • One or more sensors may detect or monitor filling of the sample loop 908. This may be used to trigger a subsequent configuration of the control valve 904.
  • a second configuration 900b of the control valve 904 is shown.
  • the control valve 904 may be operated to insert or redirect sample loop 908 into another flow, such as a high pressure flow.
  • the control valve 904 may receive a flow F9c at a fifth port.
  • the flow F9c may be a high pressure or other flow that is distinct from the flow F9a received by the control valve 904 at the first port (e.g., such as the pressurized combination output by the injection module 340 of FIG. 7).
  • the fifth port may be fluidically coupled with the sixth port.
  • the sample loop 908 may be fluidically coupled with the sixth port and the third port of the control valve 904. Accordingly, when the control valve 904 is in the second configuration 900b, the flow F9c received at the fifth port may flow to the sixth port and through the sample loop 908.
  • the third port may be fluidically coupled with a fourth port of the control valve 904.
  • the control valve 904 may output a flow F9d at the fourth port based on the sample loop 908 filling from the flow F9c received at the fifth port of the control valve 904.
  • the sample loop 908 may be filled with a chemical compound or other substance received at the first port of the control valve 904 (e.g., a mobile chromatography phase).
  • the control valve 904 may introduce the flow F9c into the substance contained within the sample loop 908 in the second
  • the flow F9c may generally correspond to an output of an injection module, such as the injection module 340 described herein with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8.
  • the output of the injection module 340 may be a pressurized combination of reagent and buffer.
  • the exit flow F9d may generally correspond to an inlet of a column or separation structure, such as the column 820 described with respect to FIG.
  • the second configuration 900b may therefore be used to advance a substance or compound held by the sample loop 908 toward an inlet of a column.
  • the second configuration 900b may cause the pressurized combination (of the injection module 340) to flow from the fifth port, to the sixth port, through the sample loop 908 to the third port, to the fourth port, thereby causing the mobile chromatography solution to exit the control valve 904 at the flow F9d and toward the column.
  • a third configuration 900c of the control valve is shown.
  • the control valve 904 may be operated to direct the flow F9c to a waste receptacle or otherwise vent to atmospheric or near atmospheric pressure.
  • the fifth port may be fluidically coupled to a seventh port of the control valve.
  • a flow F9e may exit the control valve 904 at the seventh port, which, in certain embodiments, may function as a vent or relief of the flow F9c.
  • the third configuration 900c also allows the flow F9c to bypass or otherwise flow through the control valve 904 without traversing the sample loop.
  • the flow F9e may be coupled with a receptacle, such as receptacle 890 described with respect to FIG. 8, or other component that may serve as a vent or collection structure for waste fluids.
  • the third configuration 900c may allow the analysis device 300 to repressurize an output (pressurized combination of reagent and buffer) of the injection module 340.
  • the third configuration 900c of the control valve may be triggered. By venting an output of the pumps to atmospheric or near atmospheric pressure, static pressure at the output of the pumps may be reduced, thereby helping to prime the pumps or otherwise pressurize the output.
  • FIG. 10A depicts a detection assembly 1028.
  • the detection assembly 1028 may be substantially analogous to the detection assembly 828 described above with respect to FIG. 8.
  • the detection assembly 1028 may be configured to detect aldehydes output from a column (e.g., column 820 of FIG. 8).
  • the detection assembly 1028 may detect an increase in brightness of particles that flow between an emitter (laser) and a detector.
  • the emitter may radiate or impart energy to the particles that causes fluorescent ones of the particles (e.g., a fluorescent dye) to fluoresce (e.g., increase in brightness).
  • Aldehydes may be attached or bonded to the fluorescent dye, and thus the detected increase in brightness may be associated with the presence of aldehydes.
  • the detection assembly 1028 may measure a degree or intensity of the increase in brightness of aldehydes (or aldehyde groups). This may be compared with a baseline brightness value (e.g., of a sample having a known aldehyde content) to determine the relative or absolute quantity or concentration of a given aldehyde sample.
  • a baseline brightness value e.g., of a sample having a known aldehyde content
  • the detection assembly 1028 may include an emitter 1058.
  • the emitter 1058 may be a laser, light, or other excitation source configured to emit energy (e.g., electromagnetic radiation) toward a flow of particles.
  • the emitter 1058 is shown in FIG. 10A as emitting an output 1062 of electromagnetic radiation.
  • the output 1062 may generally correspond to a laser or radiation beam that is emitted from the emitter 1058.
  • the detector 1066 and the emitter 1058 may be positioned along opposing sides of the particle flow such that the particle flow passes between the emitter 1058 and the detector 1066 and through the output 1062 of electromagnetic radiation (e.g., through a beam emitted by the emitter 1058).
  • the detector 1066 may be an optical sensor (e.g., a CCD or a CMOS sensor) that measures changes in light; however, this is not required.
  • the detector 1066 may be another sensor responsive to aldehydes, configured to measure or detect various physical and/or chemical properties of aldehydes, or otherwise configured to measure changes in concentrations of aldehyde groups within a flow path.
  • changes in light measured by the detector 1066 may be associated with fluorescing of a dye attached to aldehydes in a flow of particles between the detector 1066 and the emitter 1058.
  • the detector 1066 may receive and/or detect the output 1062 from the emitter 1058, as well as any optical phenomena due to the particles and/or fluorescence in the flow path, and generate a signal in response to the received and/or detected phenomena. In some cases, for example, the detector 1066 detects an increase or change in brightness (or color or other phenomena) caused by the fluorescence of the dye.
  • the detector 1066 may be coupled with, or include, a filter 1070, such as a band-pass or other filter.
  • the filter 1070 may be tuned in order to expose the detector 1066 to a set band of wavelengths (e.g., such as those corresponding to the expected wavelength of fluorescing dye), but otherwise block light or other radiation from the emitter 1058. This may allow the detector 1066 to detect light produced by the fluorescence of particles, but otherwise block or reduce the brightness (or amount) of radiation from the emitter 1058 that is incident on the detector 1066.
  • the emitter 1058 may be a laser.
  • the laser may be configured to produce the output 1062.
  • the output 1062 may be a beam having a predefined wavelength, such as 520 nanometers; however, other wavelengths are possible.
  • the filter 1070 may be configured to allow energy having a range of certain wavelengths to pass therethrough.
  • the filter 1070 may allow wavelengths of greater than 520 nm to 540 nm to pass therethrough. Other wavelengths may be substantially blocked.
  • the range of certain wavelengths allowed to pass through the filter 1070 may generally correspond to a wavelength of energy emitted by fluorescing particles, and the wavelength of energy blocked by the filter 1070 may generally correspond to a wavelength of energy of the output 1062. Accordingly, when the detector 1066 detects light through the filter 1070, the detected light may be substantially only light from the fluoresced particles, thus reducing or eliminating the effect of the output 1062 on the detection of the aldehyde content within the flow.
  • the detection assembly 1028 may include a housing 1074.
  • the housing 1074 may generally be used to support the emitter 1058 and the detector 1066 within the detection assembly 1028 relative to a flow of particles.
  • particles may flow through the housing 1074 along or within a through portion 1075.
  • the through portion 1075 may be a fully or partially transparent passage or conduit of the housing 1074 that extends along a path substantially between the emitter 1058 and the detector 1066. This may allow the emitter 1058 to direct the output 1062 toward the through portion 1075 in order to fluoresce particles contained therein.
  • the detector 1066 positioned along the through portion 1075 opposite the emitter 1058, may register or detect the corresponding changes in brightness caused by the fluoresced particles.
  • the through portion 1075 may be configured to receive a flow F10a.
  • the flow F10a may be an output from a column (e.g., column 820 of FIG. 8) or other separation structure of an HPLC process that contains aldehydes of a patient breath sample. Accordingly, as described above with respect to FIG. 8, the flow F10a may include clusters of distinct aldehyde groups that are separated from one another. In the embodiment of FIG.
  • the flow F10a may include a first aldehyde group cluster 1050a, a second aldehyde group cluster 1050b, and a third aldehyde group cluster 1050c, each of which may be directed by the through portion 1075 within the housing 1074 and expelled at a flow F10b.
  • Each of the first aldehyde group cluster 1050a, the second aldehyde group cluster 1050b, and the third aldehyde group cluster 1050c may include a fluorescent dye.
  • the detector 1066 may detect a fluoresce of the dye.
  • the housing 1074 may also include various other structures that help facilitate the operation of the detection assembly 1028.
  • the housing 1074 may define a heat sink 1078.
  • the heat sink 1078 may be fins or other structures configured to radiate heat away from the emitter 1058. This may help reduce excess heat in the detection assembly 1028, which may enhance the reliability and longevity of various components of the analysis device, including the detector 1066.
  • Other structures may be defined by the housing 1074 too, such as those configured to receive and/or position the emitter 1058 relative to the detector 1066.
  • FIG. 10B depicts a brightness-time diagram 1080.
  • the brightness-time diagram 1080 depicts a sample output from the detector 1066 or other detector of the detection assembly 1028 described with respect to FIG. 10A.
  • the brightness-time diagram 1080 depicts a curve 1082 that represents a brightness of light detected by detector 1066.
  • the brightness may correspond to fluoresced light, such as that emitted by a fluorescent dye when hit by an excitation source, or otherwise impacted from radiation.
  • the brightness-time diagram 1080 may include a brightness axis 1084 and a time axis 1086.
  • the brightness axis 1084 may generally represent a property of the light that is detected by the detector 1066.
  • the property of the light may correspond to an intensity of light (e.g., degree of brightness) detected by the detector 1066 as measured over a period of time, represented by the time axis 1086.
  • clusters of like aldehyde groups may flow through a through portion 1075 (e.g., a tube) that is proximate the detector 1066 (e.g., such as within a field of the detector 1066) and fluoresce when hit by the emitter 1058 with radiation.
  • the curve 1082 may include multiple peaks that represent an increase in brightness caused by the fluorescence of multiple distinct clusters of aldehyde groups. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 10B, the curve 1082 may include a first peak 1088a, a second peak 1088b, and a third peak 1088c, each of which may correspond to an increase in brightness or radiation measured by the detector 1066 from a distinct aldehyde cluster. [0170] To illustrate, and with reference to FIG.
  • the first peak 1088a may generally correspond to the first aldehyde group cluster 1050a
  • the second peak 1088b may generally correspond to the second aldehyde group cluster 1050b
  • the third peak 1088c may generally correspond to the third aldehyde group cluster 1050c.
  • the first peak 1088a may represent an increase in brightness (or other property or phenomena) measured by the detector 1066 when the output 1062 is incident on the first aldehyde group cluster 1050a
  • the second peak 1088b may represent an increase in brightness (or other property or phenomena) measured by the detector 1066 when the output 1062 is incident on second aldehyde group cluster 1050b
  • the third peak 1088c may represent an increase in brightness (or other property or phenomena) measured by the detector 1066 when the output 1062 is incident on the third aldehyde group cluster 1050c.
  • each of the respective peaks of the curve 1082 may be associated with a particular aldehyde group or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, etc.) based on the occurrence of the peak for a given time (e.g., as represented by the time axis 1086).
  • the aldehyde group cluster may pass through the column 820 of FIG. 8 at specified intervals based on various process factors, including the pressurized output of, for example, the injection module 340 of FIGs. 3 - 8. These process factors may be controlled or tuned in order to anticipate a time, order, sequence, and/or other distinguishable pattern of aldehyde group cluster propagated from the column 820.
  • the process factors may be tuned such that aldehyde group clusters of increasing molecule size (e.g., C4, C5, C6) are emitted from the column 820 and separated from one another by an interval of 30 seconds.
  • a processing unit of the analysis device 300 (or of another electronic device) may therefore associate each of the peaks of the curve 1082 with an aldehyde group cluster based on a processing time measured along the time axis 1086.
  • the analysis device 300 may allow the analysis device 300 to determine, continuing the non-limiting illustration, that the first peak 1088a corresponds to a C4 aldehyde, the second peak 1088b corresponds to a C5 aldehyde, the third peak 1088c corresponds to a C6 aldehyde, and so on, as one example.
  • the peaks of the curve 1082 may correspond to other aldehyde groups or designations based on the value of the respective peak relative to the time axis 1086.
  • An amplitude of a peak of the curve 1082 may be analyzed to determine a relative value (quantity, amount, concentration) of the associated aldehyde group cluster.
  • the curve 1082 may be integrated relative to each of the detected peaks to determine a value of each of the associated aldehyde group clusters. While the peaks of the curve 1082 are shown in FIG. 10B as having similar amplitude for the purposes of the illustration, it will be appreciated that a patient breath sample may have peaks of varying or distinct amplitudes, and thus each value of the associated aldehyde group cluster may be different from one another.
  • aldehyde group clusters may be associated with, or derived from, a calibrant (e.g., as described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8).
  • the calibrant may have a known or standardized aldehyde content of a certain aldehyde group, such as an aldehyde group that is distinct from that which may be found in a patient breath sample. This calibrant may be added to the mobile chromatography phase, separated through the HPLC process, and detected by the detector 1066.
  • the amplitude of the peak associated with the aldehyde group cluster may serve as a reference point for determining a relative concentration or aldehyde content of the other detected aldehydes.
  • This relative concentration may be output to a user (e.g., using graphical outputs) and transmitted to another electronic device to assist in diagnosing certain medical conditions.
  • the analysis device 300 may determine an aldehyde score or other composite or derived metric using some or all of the relative concentrations.
  • FIG. 10C depicts a detection assembly 1090, which may be an embodiment of the detection assembly 1028 of FIG. 10A, and may include the same, similar, and/or analogous components, and/or may provide the same, similar, and/or analogous functions as the detection assembly 1028.
  • the detection assembly 1090 may include a housing 1091 that may substantially enclose and support operational components of the detection assembly 1090, such as an emitter, a detector, an optical assembly, and other electronics, components, fluid paths, and the like.
  • the housing 1091 may be an embodiment of the housing 1074 described above with respect to FIG. 10A.
  • the housing 1091 may include a heat sink feature 1092 (e.g., thermally conductive fins) that may be thermally coupled to one or more components within the housing 1091 , such as a power converter, an emitter (e.g., a laser), a detector, or the like, and may help draw waste heat away from such components.
  • a heat sink feature 1092 e.g., thermally conductive fins
  • the housing 1091 or portions thereof, may be substantially lightproof, which may prevent stray light from interfering with optical detection functions and components within the detection assembly 1090.
  • the detection assembly 1090 may include fluid connectors 1093 that may couple to tubes, pipes, or other fluid-carrying components.
  • One of the fluid connectors 1093 may act as an inlet for a fluid flow from a column (e.g., column 820 of FIG. 8), and another of the fluid connectors 1093 may act as an output for the fluid flow to downstream modules of the breath analysis system 100.
  • one of the fluid connectors 1093 may receive the flow F10a (FIG. 10A), and the fluid may be expelled from the other fluid connector 1093 as flow F10b (FIG. 10A).
  • the fluid connectors 1093 may be quick-release style connectors that allow for fast and efficient (and non-destructive) coupling and decoupling of tubes to and from the detection assembly 1090.
  • the detection assembly 1090 also includes an electrical connector 1094, through which power may be supplied to the components of the detection assembly 1090. Such components may include an emitter and a detector, as described herein.
  • the electrical connector 1094 may also facilitate communication between the detection assembly 1090 and other components of the breath analysis system 100.
  • the electrical connector 1094 may communicatively couple the detection assembly 1090 to an analysis device (e.g., the analysis device 104, 1504, described herein) to facilitate further processing, analysis, storage, and/or display of the results of the detection assembly.
  • an analysis device e.g., the analysis device 104, 1504, described herein
  • the detection assembly 1090 may have one or more processors, memory, and/or other electrical components coupled to an optical detector, and the electrical connector 1094 may be coupled to such components to facilitate communication to other components, processors, computers, analyses devices, etc. In some cases, communications may be provided via optical couplings, via wireless communication (between the detection assembly 1090 and other devices such as an analysis device), or the like.
  • FIG. 10D is a cross-sectional view of the detection assembly 1090, taken along line A’-A’ in FIG. 10C.
  • FIG. 10D illustrates example arrangements of internal components of the detection assembly 1090 and shows an example optical scheme for facilitating detection of aldehydes in the flow that passes through the detection assembly 1090. Some internal components and/or structures of the detection assembly 1090 may be omitted from FIG.
  • the detection assembly 1090 includes a flow channel 1095 (which may be an embodiment of the through portion 1075, FIG. 10A).
  • the flow channel 1095 may be a tube or other enclosed structure that is fluidically coupled to the fluid connectors 1093 and carries fluid 1096 (e.g., fluid output from the column 820) through the detection assembly 1090.
  • the flow channel 1095 may be at least partially transparent or have an at least partially transparent segment to allow electromagnetic radiation (e.g., laser light) to enter the fluid flowing through the flow channel 1095 and to allow light (e.g., from fluorescing dyes or particles) to escape the flow channel 1095 and be detected by a detector (e.g., the detector 1004, described herein).
  • the flow channel 1095 may be formed from or include any suitable material or component, such as glass, polymer, quartz, or the like (or combinations thereof).
  • the flow channel 1095 may be positioned in and/or supported by a mounting structure 1005.
  • the mounting structure 1005 may be substantially opaque, and may define a first opening 1006 and a second opening 1007.
  • the first opening 1006 may be positioned to allow a beam of electromagnetic radiation (e.g., a laser beam) to enter into the flow channel 1095 and thus be incident on the fluid 1096 in the flow channel 1095.
  • the second opening 1007 may be positioned to allow light from fluorescing particles to exit the flow channel 1095 and be ultimately sensed or detected.
  • the mounting structure 1005 may be opaque or substantially opaque. Accordingly, the mounting structure 1005 may prevent light from entering or exiting the flow channel 1095 within the detection assembly 1090 except through the first and second openings 1006, 1007.
  • This may help prevent the dye from fluorescing due to extraneous light and/or radiation sources (e.g., by blocking extraneous light and/or radiation), and may prevent light from the fluorescing dye and/or particles from being directed in undesirable or unplanned directions.
  • the detection assembly 1090 also includes an emitter 1097, which may be an embodiment of the emitter 1058.
  • the emitter 1097 may be configured to direct a beam of electromagnetic radiation 1099 through the flow channel 1095 and into the fluid 1096 that is flowing through the flow channel 1095.
  • the emitter 1097 may emit any suitable radiation that excites the fluid 1096 or particles within the fluid 1096 and produces a detectible optical response from the fluid 1096, as described herein. More particularly, the radiation from the emitter 1097 may be configured to cause the fluid 1096 or components thereof to fluoresce. In some cases, the emitter 1097 emits a visible laser beam. In other cases, other types of lasers or electromagnetic radiation are used.
  • the emitter 1097 directs the beam of electromagnetic radiation 1099 (e.g., a laser beam) at an angle relative to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004. More particularly, as shown, the beam 1099 is substantially perpendicular to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004. This configuration may help prevent or limit the amount of radiation from the emitter 1097 that ultimately falls on the detector 1004, which may help increase the effectiveness of the detector 1004 (e.g., by increasing the signal-to-noise ratio of the light that is incident on the detector 1004).
  • electromagnetic radiation 1099 e.g., a laser beam
  • placing the emitter 1097 on an opposite side of the flow channel 1095 from the detector 1004 may effectively aim radiation from the emitter 1097 (e.g., a laser beam ) directly at the detector 1004. More particularly, light from the emitter 1097 may pass through the flow channel 1095 and the fluid 1096 and be incident on the detector 1004. Thus, light from a fluorescing dye as well as light from the emitter 1097 may be incident on the detector 1004, which may reduce the effectiveness or accuracy of the detector 1004 (and of the detection assembly 1090 as a whole). While FIG. 10D shows the beam 1099 as perpendicular to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004, other angles and configurations are also possible.
  • the beam 1099 may be directed at a 45 degree angle relative to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004.
  • Other angles and/or orientations that do not result in the beam 1099 being aimed at or being reflected or otherwise directed towards the detector 1004 may also be used.
  • the detection assembly 1090 may also include an optical assembly 1098.
  • the optical assembly 1098 includes a first lens 1001 , a filter 1003, and a second lens 1002.
  • the first lens 1001 collimates (e.g., parallelizes) light that is emitted from the flow channel 1095. For example, light that is emitted by fluorescing particles in the fluid 1096 may exit the flow channel 1095 and pass through the second opening 1007 in the mounting structure 1005, and ultimately be incident on the first lens 1001 .
  • the first lens 1001 collimates the light which then passes through the filter 1003.
  • the light may be collimated because the filter 1003, described below, may achieve a target filtering performance only when the angle of incidence of the light is perpendicular to the filter 1003.
  • the filter 1003 may be configured to pass only certain frequencies of
  • electromagnetic radiation such as those associated with the electromagnetic radiation (e.g., laser light) produced by the emitter 1097, while allowing other frequencies to pass through the filter 1003 with no or less attenuation.
  • electromagnetic radiation such as those associated with the electromagnetic radiation (e.g., laser light) produced by the emitter 1097
  • other frequencies e.g., laser light
  • light associated with the fluorescing particles or dye within the fluid 1096 may be substantially isolated from the radiation produced by the emitter, thus producing a higher signal-to-noise ratio for detection of the fluorescence.
  • the filter 1003 is a band-pass filter that is configured to pass substantially all of the light within a particular wavelength band (e.g., 520 nm - 540 nm, 510 nm - 530 nm), which may correspond to a wavelength of light emitted by a fluorescing dye in the fluid 1096, while blocking and/or attenuating light that falls outside of the particular wavelength band.
  • a particular wavelength band e.g., 520 nm - 540 nm, 510 nm - 530 nm
  • Other filters may also be used, such as longpass filters, shortpass filters, band-stop filters, notch filters, dichroic filters, or the like.
  • the particular filter style and/or filter parameters may be selected at least in part based on the frequency of the
  • electromagnetic radiation emitted by the emitter 1097 the frequency of the light emitted by fluorescing particles or dye, and/or operational parameters of an optical sensor (e.g., the sensor’s particular sensitivity to various different wavelengths of light).
  • an optical sensor e.g., the sensor’s particular sensitivity to various different wavelengths of light.
  • the second lens 1002 of the optical assembly 1098 may focus the light (or other electromagnetic radiation) that passes through the filter 1003 onto a detector 1004 (which may be an embodiment of or otherwise similar to the detector 1066 described above).
  • the second lens 1002 may focus the light to concentrate the light and/or allow the use of a smaller detector 1004 than would otherwise be necessary if the light were not focused after being collimated by the first lens 1001 .
  • the first and second lenses 1001 , 1002 may use any suitable types of lenses and/or lens assemblies.
  • the first and second lenses 1001 , 1002 may be Fresnel lenses, spherical lenses, aspherical lenses, compound lenses, convex lenses, concave lenses, biconvex lenses, biconcave lenses, meniscus lenses, plano-convex lenses, or any other suitable lens.
  • the first and second lenses 1001 , 1002 may be formed of or include any suitable materials, such as plastics (e.g., polycarbonate), glass, sapphire, crystal, or the like.
  • the detector 1004 may be an optical sensor that measures or detects (optionally in conjunction with processors and/or other electronic components) one or more aspects of the light that is focused thereon by the second lens 1002.
  • the detector 1004 may produce a signal that represents or corresponds to a brightness, color, luminous flux, luminance, or any other suitable optical property of the incident light.
  • a processor or other component associated with the detection assembly 1090 may convert the signal produced by the detector 1004 (which may be an analog electrical signal) to another form (e.g., a digital signal corresponding to a value of an optical property). Other operations, transformations, mappings, or the like may also be performed by a processor to produce a useable detector output.
  • the output of the detector 1004 and any optional processors or circuitry may be sent to another component of the breath analysis system 100 via the electrical connector 1094 and/or via a wireless communications path.
  • FIG. 1 1 depicts a sample piping and instrument diagram for an analysis device 1 100.
  • the analysis device 1 100 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 300 described above with respect to FIG. 3.
  • the analysis device 1 100 may include a reagent module 1 1 10, a breath capture module 1 120, a mixing module 1130, an injection module 1 140, and a detection module 1 150.
  • the various modules of the analysis device 1 100 represent collections of mechanical components, instruments, and so on that collectively operate to perform the various functions described herein. Rather than define discrete or separated mechanical components or instruments, the modules may be fluidically coupled with one another and operate using various combinations of common, overlapping, and/or interconnecting components and instruments.
  • FIG. 1 1 depicts one embodiment of components and instruments that may be used to fluidically couple and operate the reagent module 1 1 10, the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, the injection module 1 140, and the detection module 1150.
  • the reagent module 1 1 10 may be substantially analogous to the reagent module 310 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8.
  • the reagent module 1 1 10 may be configured to include some or all of the chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and so on used by the analysis device 1 100 for detection of the aldehyde content of a breath sample.
  • the reagent module 1 1 10 may include a first reagent 1 1 12a, a second reagent 1 1 12b, a third reagent 1 1 12c, a fourth reagent 1 1 12d, a fifth reagent 1 1 12e, a sixth reagent 1 1 12f , a first filter 1 1 14a, a second filter 1 1 14b, and a receptacle 1 1 16, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
  • the breath capture module 1 120 may be substantially analogous to the sample capture module 320 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8.
  • the breath capture module 1 120 may be configured to capture aldehydes from a breath sample and elute the captured aldehydes.
  • the breath capture module 1120 may include a breath capture component 1 121 , a cartridge 1 122, a vacuum pump 1 123, a pan 1 124, a flow instrument 1 125, a fixed volume pump 1 126, a first multi-position valve 1 127a, a second multi-position valve 1 127b, a third multi-position valve 1 127c, a fourth multi-position valve 1 127d, and a directional valve 1 128, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
  • the mixing module 1 130 may be substantially analogous to the mixing module 330 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8.
  • the mixing module 1 130 may be configured to form a mobile chromatography phase using the elution formed by the breath capture module 1 120.
  • the mixing module 1 130 may include a first mixing pump 1 132a, a second mixing pump 1 132b, a third mixing pump 1 132c, a mixing volume 1 134, a first directional valve 1 136a, a second directional valve 1 136b, a flow instrument 1 137, and a multi-position valve 1 138, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
  • the injection module 1 140 may be substantially analogous to the injection module 340 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8.
  • the injection module 1 140 may be configured to form a pressurized flow that is used to advance the mobile
  • the injection module 1 140 may include a first injection pump 1 142a, a second injection pump 1142b, a mixing tee 1 144, and a flow instrument 1 146, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
  • the detection module 1 150 may be substantially analogous to the detection module 350 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8.
  • the detection module 1 150 may be configured to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample using an output of the injection module 1 140 and the mixing module 1 130.
  • the detection module 1 150 may include a control valve 1 152, a sample loop 1 154, a column 1 155, a detection assembly 1 156, a regulator 1 157, a flow instrument 1 158, and a detection pump 1 159, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
  • FIGs. 12A - 121 depict various operations of the analysis device 1 100.
  • FIGs. 12A - 121 represent various fluid flows through one or more of the reagent module 1 1 10, the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, the injection module 1 140, and the detection module 1 150.
  • Each of the fluid flows may correspond to a configuration of the analysis device 1 100 that is one of a multi-step, integrated process that captures aldehydes from a patient breath sample and determines an aldehyde content using an unattended HPLC process.
  • FIGs. 12A—121 are presented for purposes of illustration only. Other flows and
  • a flow 1290a of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290a may correspond to an operation of capturing aldehydes from a patient breath sample on a permeable membrane. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12A, the flow 1290a may represent a flow of a patient breath sample from the breath capture component 1 121 to the pan 1 124.
  • a flow 1290b of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290b may correspond to an operation of forming an elution from the captured aldehydes of the patient breath sample. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12B, the flow 1290b may represent a flow of reagent from the first reagent 1 1 12a through the cartridge 1 122 (eluting the aldehydes) and to the mixing volume 1 134.
  • the flow 1290b may also represent a flow of further reagents (e.g., fourth reagent 1 1 12d, fifth reagent 1 112e, sixth reagent 1 1 12f), including catalysts, calibrants, dyes, and so on, into the mixing volume 1 134.
  • further reagents e.g., fourth reagent 1 1 12d, fifth reagent 1 112e, sixth reagent 1 1 12f
  • a flow 1290c of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290c may correspond to an operation of mixing the chemical compounds contained with the mixing volume 1 134 with air (air agitation), which may help form the mobile chromatography phase. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12C, the flow 1290c may represent a flow of air from the first filter 11 14a to the mixing volume 1 134.
  • a flow 1290d of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290d may correspond to an operation of forming a pressurized combination of reagent and buffer. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12D, the flow 1290d may represent a flow of the second reagent 1 112b and the third reagent 1 1 12c into the control valve 1 152 using the first injection pump 1 142a and the second injection pump 1 142b, respectively.
  • a flow 1290e of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290e may correspond to an operation of loading a mobile chromatography phase into a fixed volume. Accordingly, as shown in FIG.
  • the flow 1290e may represent a flow of the mobile chromatography phase into the sample loop 1 154 from the mixing volume 1 134.
  • the flow 1290e may be initiated by the detection pump 1 159 when the control valve 1 152 is in a first configuration (e.g., configuration 900a described with respect to FIG. 9A).
  • a flow 1290f of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290f may correspond to an operation of pushing the mobile chromatography phase through a column or other separation structure of the detection module 1 150.
  • the flow 1290f may represent a flow of the pressurized combination output from the injection module 1 140 into the sample loop 1154, through the column 1 155, detection assembly 1 156, and to the receptacle 1 1 16 of the reagent module 1 1 10.
  • the flow 1290f may be initiated when the control valve 1 152 is in a second configuration (e.g., configuration 900b described with respect to FIG. 9B).
  • a flow 1290g of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290g may correspond to an operation of priming or repressurizing an output of the injection module 1 140. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12G, the flow 1290g may represent a flow of an output of the injection module 1140 through the control valve 1152 and to the receptacle 1 1 16.
  • the flow 1290g may be initiated when the control valve 1152 is in a third configuration (e.g., configuration 900b described with respect to FIG. 9C).
  • a flow 1290h of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290h may correspond to an operation of sanitizing or otherwise flushing one or more components of the analysis device 1 100 with a reagent. For example, this may be subsequent to an analysis of aldehydes in a first breath sample, in order to prepare the analysis for an analysis of aldehydes in a second or subsequent breath sample.
  • the flow 1290h may represent a flow of the second reagent 1 1 12b through the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, and to the receptacle 1 1 16 of the reagent module 1 1 10.
  • a flow 1290i of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted.
  • the flow 1290i may correspond to an operation of purging or otherwise passing air through one or more components of the analysis device 1100. For example, this may be used in order to prepare the analysis device 1 100 for an analysis of aldehydes in a second or subsequent breath sample.
  • the flow 1290i may represent a flow of air through the first filter 1 1 14a and through the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, and to the receptacle 1 1 16 of the reagent module 1 110.
  • FIGs. 13A and 13B depict a sample piping and instrument diagram from an analysis device 1300.
  • the analysis device 1300 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 1 100 described above with respect to FIGs. 11 - 121.
  • the analysis device 1300 may be configured to capture aldehydes from a breath sample and determine a relative aldehyde content using an unattended HPLC process, as described herein.
  • the analysis device 1300 may include a reagent module, a breath capture module, a mixing module, an injection module, and a detection module, which collectively operate to perform the various functions of the HPLC process described herein.
  • the analysis device 1300 shown in FIGs. 13A and 13B may include a reagent module having: a first reagent 1312a; a second reagent 1312b; a third reagent 1312c; a fourth reagent 1312d; a fifth reagent 1312e; a sixth reagent 1312f ; a first filter 1314a; a second filter 1314b; and a receptacle 1316, among other components.
  • a reagent module having: a first reagent 1312a; a second reagent 1312b; a third reagent 1312c; a fourth reagent 1312d; a fifth reagent 1312e; a sixth reagent 1312f ; a first filter 1314a; a second filter 1314b; and a receptacle 1316, among other components.
  • the analysis device 1300 shown in FIGs. 13A and 13B may include a breath capture module having: a breath capture component 1321 ; a cartridge 1322, a vacuum pump 1323; a pan 1324; a flow instrument 1325; a fixed volume pump 1326; a first multi-position valve 1327a; a second multi-position valve 1327b; a third multi-position valve 1327c; a fourth multiposition valve 1327d; and a directional valve 1328, among other components.
  • a breath capture module having: a breath capture component 1321 ; a cartridge 1322, a vacuum pump 1323; a pan 1324; a flow instrument 1325; a fixed volume pump 1326; a first multi-position valve 1327a; a second multi-position valve 1327b; a third multi-position valve 1327c; a fourth multiposition valve 1327d; and a directional valve 1328, among other components.
  • the analysis device 1300 may include a mixing module having: a first mixing pump 1332a; a second mixing pump 1332b; a third mixing pump 1332c; a mixing volume 1334; a first directional valve 1336a; a second directional valve 1336b; a flow instrument 1337; and a multi-position valve 1338, among other components.
  • a mixing module having: a first mixing pump 1332a; a second mixing pump 1332b; a third mixing pump 1332c; a mixing volume 1334; a first directional valve 1336a; a second directional valve 1336b; a flow instrument 1337; and a multi-position valve 1338, among other components.
  • the analysis device 1300 may include an injection module having: a first injection pump 1342a; a second injection pump 1342b; a mixing tee 1344; and a flow instrument 1346, among other components.
  • the analysis device 1300 may include a detection module having: a control valve 1352; a sample loop 1354; a column 1355; a detection assembly 1356; a regulator 1357; a flow instrument 1358; and a detection pump 1359, among other components. Redundant explanation of each of the foregoing components, assemblies, structures, instruments, and so forth is omitted here for clarity.
  • the analysis device 1300 may be configured to remove dissolved gases within reagents that are used by the high-pressure pumps of the injection module.
  • the first injection pump 1342a may be configured to output a pressurized flow of the second reagent 1312b and the second injection pump 1342b may be configured to output a pressurized flow of the third reagent 1312c.
  • Dissolved gasses within one or both of the second reagent 1312b or the third reagent 1312c may decrease pump performance over time.
  • high dissolved gas content within the second reagent 1312b or the third reagent 1312c may cause the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pump 1324b to deprime or cavitate, thereby resulting in decreased or nominal pressure at an output of the pumps.
  • the analysis device 1300 may employ one or more degassers, for example, at an input to various pumps within the device.
  • the analysis device 1300 include a first degasser 1343a and the second degasser 1343b.
  • the first degasser 1343a may be coupled with an input of the first injection pump 1342a and the second degasser 1343b may be coupled with an input of the second injection pump 1342b.
  • the first degasser 1343a and the second degasser 1343b may be vacuum-type degassers, which utilize vacuum pressure to draw dissolved gasses from a given fluid stream; however, in other embodiments, other degassing systems may be employed.
  • the vacuum pump 1323 may be fluidically coupled with the first degasser 1343a and the second degasser 1343b.
  • the vacuum pump 1323 may be configured to draw air through one or both of the first degasser 1343a or the second degasser 1343b. This may form a vacuum or otherwise form a reduced pressure environment within an internal chamber of the respective degasser. Dissolved gasses within a fluidic input to the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pump 1342b may migrate toward the reduced pressure environment, and thus be removed or substantially removed from the pump input.
  • the inputs e.g., second reagent 1312b, third reagent 1312c, and so on
  • the analysis device 1300 may output various chemical waste streams, which may eventually flow toward the receptacle 1316.
  • the various waste outputs of the analysis deice 1300 may, however, in some cases be used to clean, flush, or otherwise cycle fluid through the high-pressure pumps.
  • FIG. 13A shows the analysis device 1300 having a recirculation reservoir 1347.
  • the recirculation reservoir 1347 may receive a waste output from the detection module, as described herein.
  • the waste output may include various combinations of methanol, waste, and/or other chemicals that may be used to help clean the high-pressure pumps of the injection module.
  • the recirculation reservoir 1347 may be used to collect some or all of the waste output and direct the output to the high-pressure pumps.
  • the recirculation reservoir 1347 may be fluidically coupled with one or both of the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pump 1342b. This
  • the configuration may allow the waste stream to be circulated relative to the piston (or other internal component) of the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pumps 1342b.
  • the waste stream as shown in FIG. 13A, may travel back toward the recirculation reservoir 1347 and ultimately to the receptacle 1316 of the reagent module, where it may be disposed. This may enhance the longevity of the pumps using waste chemicals present as a result of the HPLC process of the analysis device 1300.
  • the manifold may be a physical connection point or juncture within the analysis device 1300 that is configured to connect each of the associated components.
  • the manifold may be an assembly of structures that connect certain one of the components of the analysis device 1300 to one another.
  • FIG. 13B shows an example implementation of manifolds within the analysis device 1300. Other implementations are possible and within the scope of the present disclosure, including implementing and connecting each of the various components, assemblies, instruments of the analysis device 1300 with a single manifold.
  • FIG. 13B depicts a reagent container manifold 1390.
  • the reagent container manifold 1390 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with one or more of the a first reagent 1312a; a second reagent 1312b; a third reagent 1312c; a fourth reagent 1312d; a fifth reagent 1312e; a sixth reagent 1312f ; a first filter 1314a; a second filter 1314b; and a receptacle 1316.
  • FIG. 13B further shows a first process manifold 1392.
  • the first process manifold 1392 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the second multi-position valve 1327b and the third multi-position valve 1327c of the breath capture module.
  • FIG. 13B further shows a second process manifold 1394.
  • the second process manifold 1394 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the fixed volume pump 1326 of the breath capture module.
  • FIG. 13B further shows a third process manifold 1396.
  • the third process manifold 1396 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the first multi-position valve 1327a and the fourth multi-position valve 1327d of the breath capture module
  • FIG. 13B further shows a fourth process manifold 1398.
  • the fourth process manifold 1392 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the first mixing pump 1332a, the second mixing pump 1332b, the third mixing pump 1332c, the mixing volume 1334, the first directional valve 1336a, the second directional valve 1336b, the multi-position valve 1338, the detection pump 1359, and the recirculation reservoir 1347 of the mixing and/or detection modules.
  • FIG. 13B further shows various interface manifolds.
  • the interface manifold may be used to fluidically couple one or more of the process manifolds to one another.
  • FIG. 13B shown a first interface manifold 1393a and the second interface manifold 1393b.
  • the first interface manifold 1393a may be used to fluidically couple various flows of the first process manifold 1392 with various flows of the second process manifold 1394.
  • the second interface manifold 1393b may be used to fluidically couple various flows of the first process manifold 1392 with the fourth process manifold 1398.
  • process 1400 relates generally to determining an aldehyde content of multiple breath samples.
  • the process 1400 may be used with any of the breath analysis systems and breath analysis devices described herein, for example, such as breath analysis system 100, analysis device 104 and 300 and variations and embodiments thereof.
  • a first breath sample of multiple breath samples may be drawn through a permeable membrane of an analysis device.
  • a breath sample contained within the breath capture component 404 may be drawn through the permeable membrane 412 of the analysis device 300.
  • a pump 424 in one embodiment, may be a vacuum pump that is used to evacuate the breath sample from the breath capture component 404 and through the permeable membrane 412.
  • the permeable membrane 412 may be a silica bed or other structure that may capture aldehydes from the breath sample as it is drawn through.
  • a breath sample may be eluted from the permeable membrane using a first reagent from a container positioned within the analysis device.
  • the second sample capture reagent 436 may be propagated through the permeable membrane 412.
  • the second sample capture reagent 436 may elute aldehydes captured by the permeable membrane 412 as it flows through the cartridge.
  • the elution may be advanced toward a mixing module (e.g., mixing module 330 of FIG. 5) in order to form a mobile chromatography phase that contains the aldehydes from the patient breath sample.
  • an eluted breath sample may be advanced through a column using a second reagent from a container within the analysis device.
  • the eluted breath sample may be part of a mobile chromatography phase that is advanced through the column 820 by the pressurized combination output from the injection module 340.
  • the mobile chromatography phase (formed at least partially from the eluted breath sample) may be loaded into the sample loop 808 and advanced through the column 820 by the flow F7, which may be an output of the injection module 340.
  • fluoresced particles may be detected at an output of the column corresponding to an aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the output of the column 820 may be analyzed by a detection assembly 828.
  • the detection assembly 828 may detect fluoresced light emitted by fluorescent dye when the dye receives energy from an emitter or other energy source (e.g., as described in great detail above with respect to FIGs. 10A and 10B).
  • the operations 1404 - 1416 may be repeated for a second breath sample.
  • the analysis device 300 may be configured for multiple, successive analyses of patient breath samples.
  • the analysis device 300 may be used in a clinical setting in which multiple samples are collected from patients and analyzed using the analysis device 300 by substantially untrained personnel.
  • the analysis device 300 may be configured to reset or return to an initial configuration in order to analyze subsequent breath samples. In one embodiment, this may involve flushing an internal network of tubes with further reagents from the container of the analysis device 300, for example, which may help sanitize or sterilize the analysis device 300 so that the aldehydes of the previous sample do not influence the detection of aldehydes in a subsequent breath sample.
  • the internal network tubes may also be purged with air filtered through the container, such as through the filter 440. This may help dry various components of the analysis device 300, prior to receiving reagents for the analysis of aldehydes in a subsequent breath sample.
  • the analysis device 300 may use various chemical compounds or reagents to determine an aldehyde content of a breath sample.
  • the reagents may be contained within a container of the analysis device 300.
  • the analysis device 300 may include a container having internal chambers that may hold the reagents used by the analysis device 300 for the determination of an aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the container may include a quantity of at least a first reagent and a second reagent for the first breath sample and the second breath sample. Accordingly, the analysis device 300 may operate to determine an aldehyde content of multiple patient breath samples using the same container.
  • the container may include sufficient reagents so that the analysis device 300 may analyze breath samples of each patient of a clinician on a given day or week, as one possibility.
  • FIGs. 15 - 18 depict an analysis device 1504.
  • the analysis device 1504 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 104 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 2E.
  • the analysis device 1504 may be configured to determine an aldehyde content of a breath sample.
  • the analysis device 1504 may include an unattended HPLC process and one or more systems that capture and elute aldehydes of a breath sample and detect aldehydes according to molecule size once separated by the HPLC.
  • the analysis device 1504 may include an enclosure 1508 and a display 1512, among other components.
  • the enclosure 1508 may form an external surface of the analysis device 1504 that conceals various components, modules, and systems of the analysis device 1504.
  • the display 1512 may be a touch sensitive display configured to depict an output of the analysis device 1504 corresponding to a detected aldehyde content. Redundant explanation of these features is omitted here for clarity.
  • the analysis device 1504 is shown having a container 1524 at least partially received within an opening 1520 of the enclosure 1508.
  • the container 1524 may be a reagent container that is configured to hold reagents, chemical compounds, or other substances or solutions within internal chambers defined within an internal volume of the container 1524 (e.g., as described below with respect to FIG. 17).
  • the chemical compounds held within the container 1524 may be substantially concealed by the enclosure 1508 or otherwise positioned within the analysis device 1504.
  • the analysis device 1504 is shown having the container 1524 removed from the opening 1520.
  • the container 1524 may be a removable component of the analysis device 1504. This may allow the container 1524 to include a quantity of reagents used for multiple breath analyses. When one or more of the reagents held within the container has a volume insufficient for subsequent breath analyses, the container 1524 may be replaced with a new container having a replenished quantity of reagents.
  • the container 1524 may be coupled to the analysis device 1504 using a variety of different structures and assemblies.
  • one or more fasteners, clips, guides, protrusions, and/or other attachment structures, and so on may be used to removeably couple the container to the analysis device 1504.
  • such attachment structures may be configured to secure the container 1524 within the opening 1520 upon rotating the container 1524 by a predetermined amount, such as a 45, 60, or 90 degree turn, when the container 1524 is at least partially received within the opening 1520.
  • a user may rotate the container by a predetermined amount, such as a 45, 60, or 90 degree turn, in an opposing direction from the input used to attach the container 1524 within the analysis device 1504.
  • the analysis device 1504 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents or other chemical compounds from the container 1524 in order to perform one or more of the functions described herein.
  • the container 1524 may include a group of passages 1528.
  • the group of passages 1528 may be configured to fluidically couple with a corresponding group of receiving features 1532 of the analysis device 1504.
  • Each of the passages 1528, as described below with respect to FIG. 17, may be fluidically coupled with an internal chamber configured to hold a distinct reagent.
  • the group of receiving features 1532 may dispense particular reagents from the container 1524 using a corresponding one of the group of passages 1528.
  • the analysis device 300 may selectively dispense reagents (e.g., using fixed volume pumps), and thus it will be appreciated that the group of receiving features 1532 shown in FIG. 15 may be fluidically coupled with appropriate components, instruments, devices, and so on, to facilitate such functionality.
  • FIG. 17 a simplified cross-sectional view of the analysis device 1504 and the container 1524 is shown.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates the container 1524 having a group of internal chambers 1529.
  • the group of internal chambers 1529 may be cavities or internal volumes of the container 1524 that are separated from one another.
  • each chamber of the group of internal chambers 1529 may be configured to hold a distinct chemical compound.
  • a respective passage of the group of passages 1528 may be fluidically coupled to corresponding ones of the group of internal chambers 1529.
  • a chemical compound held within an internal chamber of the container 1524 may be dispensed by the analysis device 1504 through the corresponding one of the group of passages 1528 and into an associated receiving feature.
  • each of the internal chambers of the group of internal chambers 1529 may be configured for use with a certain chemical compound, and therefore may include or be coupled with a coating, material, and so on tailored for the chemical compound (e.g., to resist leaking, corrosion, and/or degradation).
  • the container 1524 e.g., reagent module 310 of FIG. 3
  • FIG. 18 depicts a cross-sectional view of the analysis device 1504 of FIG. 15, taken along line A-A of FIG 15.
  • the enclosure 1508 may define an internal volume 1509 of the analysis device. While not shown in FIG. 18 for the interest of clarity, some or all of the components of, with reference to FIG. 3, the reagent module 310, the sample capture module 320, the mixing module 330, the injection module 340, and/or the detection module 350 may be positioned or concealed by the enclosure 1508.
  • the analysis device 1504 may include a false bottom 1510 positioned within the internal volume 1509 and coupled to the enclosure 1508. The false bottom 1510 may be used to channel stray fluids within the internal volume 1509 toward a collection volume 151 1 .
  • Stray fluids may be caused, for example, in the event of leak or other failure of the various components of the reagent module 310, the sample capture module 320, the mixing module 330, the injection module 340, and/or the detection module 350, described herein.
  • the internal volume 1509 may be substantially sealed from an external environment, and thus stray fluids may migrate toward the false bottom 1510 and into the collection volume 151 1 .
  • Stray fluids may thus pool or build up in the collection volume 151 1 .
  • the collection volume 151 1 may be substantially sealed from the external environment, which may help prevent or mitigate leaks from the analysis device 1504. Fluids held within the collection volume 151 1 may be evacuated, for example, in order to perform maintenance on the analysis device 1504, transport the analysis device 1504, and so on.
  • the enclosure 1508 may define an outlet 1515.
  • the outlet 1515 may fluidically couple the collection volume 151 1 with the external environment.
  • a plug 1514, or other feature configured to temporarily seal the collection volume 151 1 may be positioned within the outlet 1515. Accordingly, a user may remove the plug 1514 from the outlet 1515 in order to empty fluids from the collections volume 151 1 .
  • FIG. 19 presents an illustrative analysis device 1900.
  • FIG. 19 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 104 and 300 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 and 3. However, FIG. 19 may also more generally represent other types of devices and configurations that may be used to receive a user input signal from an input device in accordance with the embodiments described herein.
  • the analysis device 1900 may include any appropriate hardware (e.g., computing devices, data centers, switches), software (e.g., applications, system programs, engines), network components (e.g., communication paths, interfaces, routers) and the like (not necessarily shown in the interest of clarity) for use in facilitating any appropriate operations disclosed herein.
  • the analysis device 1900 may include a processing unit or element 1908a operatively connected to computer memory 1912 and computer-readable media 1916.
  • the processing unit 1908a may be operatively connected to the memory 1912 and computer-readable media 1916 components via an electronic bus or bridge (e.g., such as system bus 1910).
  • the processing unit 1908a may include one or more computer processors or microcontrollers that are configured to perform operations in response to computer-readable instructions.
  • the processing element 1908a may be a central processing unit of the analysis device 1900. Additionally or alternatively, the processing unit 1908a may be other processors within the device including application specific integrated chips (ASIC) and other microcontroller devices.
  • ASIC application specific integrated chips
  • the memory 1912 may include a variety of types of non-transitory computer- readable storage media, including, for example, read access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable memory (e.g ., EPROM and EEPROM), or flash memory.
  • the memory 1912 is configured to store computer-readable instructions, sensor values, and other persistent software elements.
  • Computer-readable media 1916 may also include a variety of types of non-transitory computer-readable storage media including, for example, a hard-drive storage device, a solid state storage device, a portable magnetic storage device, or other similar device.
  • the computer-readable media 1916 may also be configured to store computer-readable instructions, sensor values, and other persistent software elements.
  • the processing unit 1908a is operable to read computer-readable instructions stored on the memory 1912 and/or computer-readable media 1916.
  • the computer-readable instructions may adapt the processing unit 1908a to perform the operations or functions described above with respect to FIGs. 2 - 16.
  • the computer- readable instructions may be provided as a computer-program product, software application, or the like.
  • the analysis device 1900 may also include a display 1918.
  • the display 1918 may include a liquid-crystal display (LCD), organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, light emitting diode (LED) display, or the like. If the display 1918 is an LCD, the display may also include a backlight component that can be controlled to provide variable levels of display brightness. If the display 1918 is an OLED or LED type display, the brightness of the display 1918 may be controlled by modifying the electrical signals that are provided to display elements.
  • the analysis device 1900 may also include a battery 1924 that is configured to provide electrical power to the components of the analysis device 1900.
  • the battery 1924 may include one or more power storage cells that are linked together to provide an internal supply of electrical power.
  • the battery 1924 may be a component of a power source 1928 (e.g., including a charging system or other circuitry that supplies electrical power to components of the analysis device 1900).
  • the battery 1924 may be operatively coupled to power management circuitry that is configured to provide appropriate voltage and power levels for individual components or groups of components within the analysis device 1900.
  • the battery 1924, via power management circuitry may be configured to receive power from an external source, such as an AC power outlet or interconnected computing device.
  • the battery 1924 may store received power so that the analysis device 1900 may operate without connection to an external power source for an extended period of time, which may range from several hours to several days.
  • the analysis device 1900 may also include one or more sensors 1940 that may be used to detect a touch and/or force input, environmental condition, orientation, position, or some other aspect of the analysis device 1900.
  • the sensors 1940 may be used to detect an input at a touch-sensitive display (e.g., display 1918) of the analysis device 1900 and/or other surface or feature, such as an external surface of the analysis device 1900 defined by an outer enclosure or shell.
  • Example sensors 1940 that may be included in the analysis device 1900 may include, without limitation, one or more accelerometers, gyrometers, inclinometers, goniometers, or magnetometers.
  • the sensors 1940 may also include one or more proximity sensors, such as a magnetic hall-effect sensor, inductive sensor, capacitive sensor, continuity sensor, or the like. Resistive and contact-based sensors may also be used.
  • the sensors 1940 may also be broadly defined to include wireless positioning devices including, without limitation, global positioning system (GPS) circuitry, Wi-Fi circuitry, cellular communication circuitry, and the like. As such, the sensors 1940 may be used to identify an environment of the analysis device 1900 (e.g., a clinical setting, a service facility, and so on). The analysis device 1900 may, in some embodiments, execute a different mode or configuration based on the identified environment, such as executing different analysis cycles, testing or calibrating produces, and so on. The analysis device 1900 may also include one or more optical sensors including, without limitation, photodetectors, photosensors, image sensors, infrared sensors, or the like.
  • the senor 1940 may be an image sensor that detects a degree to which an ambient image matches a stored image. As such, the sensors 1940 may be used to identify a user of the analysis device 1900. In this regard, the sensors 1940 may be used to control access to the analysis device 1900, for example, such as by initiating one or more operations when the sensors 1940 identify a known or authenticated user.
  • the sensors 1940 may also include one or more acoustic elements, such as a microphone used alone or in combination with a speaker element. This may allow the analysis device 1900 to be operable by voice control, among other possibilities.
  • the sensors 1940 may also include a temperature sensor, barometer, pressure sensor, altimeter, moisture sensor or other similar environmental sensor.
  • the sensors 1940 may also include a light sensor that detects an ambient light condition of the analysis device 1900.
  • the sensors 1940 may generally be a motion sensor that is configured to determine an orientation, position, and/or movement of the analysis device 1900.
  • the sensors 1940 may include one or more motion sensors including, for example, one or more accelerometers, gyrometers, magnetometers, optical sensors, or the like to detect motion.
  • the sensors 1940 may also be configured to determine one or more environmental conditions, such as temperature, air pressure, humidity, and so on.
  • the sensors 1940 either alone or in combination with other input, may be configured to estimate a property of a supporting surface including, without limitation, a material property, surface property, friction property, or the like.
  • the analysis device 1900 may also include a camera 1932 that is configured to capture a digital image or other optical data.
  • the camera 1932 may include a charge- coupled device, complementary metal oxide (CMOS) device, or other device configured to convert light into electrical signals.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide
  • the camera 1932 may also include one or more light sources, such as a strobe, flash, or other light-emitting device.
  • the camera 1932 may be generally categorized as a sensor for detecting optical conditions and/or objects in the proximity of the analysis device 1900.
  • the camera 1932 may also be used to create photorealistic images that may be stored in an electronic format, such as JPG
  • the camera 1932 may be used to capture an image of an authenticated user of the analysis device 1900.
  • the photorealistic image captured by the camera 1932 may be stored (e.g., at memory 1912 and/or an external source).
  • the sensors 1940 as described above, may be used to compare an ambient image (e.g., a user requesting access) with the stored imaged. Where the images sufficiently match, the analysis device 1900 may allow the requesting user to initiate one or more operations (e.g., testing a breath sample). This may be helpful in clinical settings, for example, in which may be desirable to limit physical contact with the analysis device 1900.
  • the analysis device 1900 may also include a communication port 1944 that is configured to transmit and/or receive signals or electrical communication from an external or separate device.
  • the communication port 1944 may be configured to couple to an external device via a cable, adaptor, or other type of electrical connector.
  • the communication port 1944 may be used to couple the analysis device 1900 with a computing device and/or other appropriate accessories configured to send and/or receive electrical signals.
  • the communication port 1944 may be configured to receive identifying information from an external accessory, which may be used to determine a mounting or support configuration.
  • the communication port 1944 may be used to determine that the analysis device 1900 is coupled to a mounting accessory, such as a particular type of stand or support structure.
  • FIGs. 20 - 26 depict a breath analysis system 2000.
  • the breath analysis system 2000 may be substantially analogous to the breath analysis system 100 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 19.
  • the breath analysis system 2000 may include one or more assemblies that capture and elute aldehydes from a breath sample of a user and an analysis device that detects concentrations of various aldehydes using an optionally attended HPLC process.
  • the breath analysis system 2000 may also include one or more assemblies configured to store and/or receive reagents or other chemicals, fluids, and so forth that facilitate the HPLC process.
  • FIGs. 20 - 26 describe an
  • reagent container that is used to store and/or receive reagents or other chemicals, fluids, and so forth that facilitate the HPLC process.
  • the reagent container described with respect to FIGs. 20 - 26 may be an example implementation of one or more components, instruments, subassemblies, or the like that cooperate to perform at least some of the functions described with respect to the reagent module 310 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 19. It will be appreciated, however, that other implementations are possible and are within the scope of the present disclosure, as described herein.
  • FIG. 20 depicts an example embodiment of the breath analysis system 2000.
  • the breath analysis system 2000 may generally include an analysis device 2004, a sample capture assembly 2020, and a reagent container 2030 (shown in phantom and positioned within the analysis device 2004).
  • the sample capture assembly 2020 may be configured to capture aldehydes from a breath sample.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be configured to hold some or all of the chemical compounds used by the analysis device 2004 for aldehyde detection of the captured breath sample.
  • the reagent container 2030 may also include one or more internal chambers configured to receive waste, filter air, and so forth.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be a removable component coupled with the analysis device 2004. As shown in FIG. 20, the reagent container 2030 is positioned substantially within the analysis device 2004, and is therefore indicated in FIG.
  • the analysis device 2004 may be configured to, in conjunction with the sample capture assembly 2020 and the reagent container 2030, form an elution containing the captured aldehydes and perform a variety of processes that are used to determine a relative aldehyde content of the breath sample.
  • the analysis device 2004 may be substantially analogous to the various analysis devices described herein, such as the analysis device 104 and the analysis device 300, and include similar components and functional features.
  • the analysis device 2004 may include an enclosure 2006, a display 2008, a graphical output 2010, and a lid 2012. It will be appreciated that the analysis device 2004 may also include various modules, such as collections of mechanical components, instruments, and so forth that collectively operate to perform the functions described herein, including at least a reagent module, sample capture module, a mixing module, an injection module, and a detection module, such as those described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 121. Redundant explanation of these components and modules is omitted here for clarity.
  • the breath analysis system 2000 is shown in a configuration in which the sample capture assembly 2020 is coupled to the analysis device 2004.
  • the sample capture assembly 2020 may be inserted into the analysis device 2004 subsequent to capturing a breath sample from a user.
  • the analysis device 2004 may sequentially initiate one or more fluid flows that draw the captured breath sample through a permeable membrane within the sample capture assembly 2020 and form an elution of aldehydes trapped within the membrane.
  • the fluid flow from the analysis device 2004 may include reagents held by the reagent container 2030.
  • FIGs. 21 A and 21 B depict a breath analysis system 2000, such as the breath analysis system generally discussed above and described in greater detail below.
  • FIGs. 21 A and 21 B depict the reagent container 2030 separated from the analysis device 2004, according to various configurations. While the reagent container 2030 is shown in FIGs. 21 A and 21 B as being a single, removable assembly, other configurations are possible.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be implemented as a collection of sub-assemblies, each separately detachable from the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may also be fully or partially integrated into the analysis device 2004.
  • FIGs. 21 A and 21 B may be used to hold and dispense reagents, such as various different types of internal chambers, vents, valves, and so forth.
  • the examples of the reagent container 2030 are shown herein for purposes of illustration only.
  • FIG. 21 A depicts an exploded view of the breath analysis system 2000.
  • the reagent container 2030 and the lid 2012 are separated from the analysis device 2004.
  • the analysis device 2004 may include a receiving feature 2014.
  • the receiving feature 2014 may be an opening positioned in a side of the analysis device 2004.
  • the receiving feature 2014 may be configured to receive the reagent container 2030 and couple the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
  • the receiving feature 2014 may have a shape that substantially matches, conforms, or aligns with a shape of the reagent container 2030.
  • the receiving feature 2014 may be a hole defined by a substantially circular perimeter with a flat bottom; however, this is not required. More broadly, the receiving feature 2014 may have a contour that matches a contour of the reagent container 2030 to facilitate engagement of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
  • the analysis device 2004 may also include various alignment features, conduits, vents, and so forth that guide the reagent container 2030 into an appropriate position within the receiving feature 2014 and/or operate to fluidically couple one or more internal chambers of the reagent container with the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may generally be a collection of internal chambers that are configured to hold various chemical compounds.
  • the internal chambers may also be configured to hold an air filter, receive process waste, and so forth in order to facilitate the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be an integrated component that also includes each and every chemical compound required to perform the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004, including having a sufficient volume of chemical compounds to perform multiple iterations of the HPLC process. For example, as described above with respect to FIGs.
  • possible chemical compounds include methanol (MeOH of a variety of concentrations, e.g., any concentration, such as between 10% and 100%, or multiple concentrations), buffers, dyes, calibrants, catalysts, and/or other items that may facilitate manipulation of aldehydes during the HPLC process. It will be appreciated, however, that the reagent container 2030 may include a subset of the chemical compounds used to facilitate the HPLC process.
  • the analysis device 2004 may also use filtered air and emit a volume of waste chemicals for each iteration of the HPLC process, among other HPLC inputs and outputs.
  • the reagent container 2030 may, in some embodiments, include structures, assemblies, devices, and so forth that operate to provide filtered air and a waste receptacle for the analysis device, among other possibilities.
  • one or more chambers of the reagent container 2030 may include an air filter.
  • the analysis device 2004 may be configured to draw ambient air through the air filter of the reagent container 2030 and thereby provide filtered air to one or more systems for use in one or more processes of the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may also include a waste volume.
  • the analysis device 2004 may be configured to dispense waste from one or more processes into the waste volume of the reagent container 2030.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be an integrated component that provides both the inputs to the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004 (e.g., reagents, filtered air flow) and that receives the outputs of the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include a group of internal chambers (not shown in FIG. 21 A) separating the various reagents, filters, waste volumes, and so forth from one another. Each of the internal chambers may be fluidically coupled with one or more conduits that define one or more a flow paths between the internal chamber and the analysis device 2004, as described in greater detail below.
  • the internal chambers may be held within an enclosed volume of the reagent container 2030.
  • FIG. 21 A shows the reagent container 2030 having an enclosure 2032 that includes, and forms an exterior barrier around, a group of internal chambers.
  • the enclosure 2032 may have one or more exterior surfaces that matches a contour of the receiving feature 2014 of the analysis device 2004. This may facilitate attachment and removal of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004 at the receiving feature 2014.
  • the reagent container 2030 may also have a handle 2033.
  • the handle 2033 may be configured to be grasped by a user and/or otherwise used to manipulate a position of the reagent container 2030 relative to the analysis device 2004.
  • the handle 2033 may allow a user to position the reagent container 2030 into the receiving feature 2014.
  • the reagent container 2030 is replaceable or consumable and, as such, the handle 2033 may also allow a user to remove the reagent container 2030 from the receiving feature 2014 when the chemical compound held within the reagent container 2030 is consumed, the waste volume of the reagent container filled, and so forth.
  • the analysis device 2004 may include a group of conduits, pins, tubes, and/or other fluidic connections that are each configured to fluidically couple with a corresponding one of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be positioned within the receiving feature 2014 and aligned with the various fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004. Such alignment may be facilitated by the corresponding or matching shapes of the receiving feature 2014 and the reagent container 2030. Alignment features, described in greater detail below, positioned along one or more walls of the analysis device 2004 may also help guide the reagent container 2030 into an appropriate position. Once aligned, the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004 may be pressed against the reagent container 2030 to complete a fluidic coupling of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
  • the lid 2012 of the analysis device 2004 may be used to both conceal the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004 and advance the reagent container 2030 toward the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be slid into the receiving feature 2014 and the lid 2012 may be screwed or fastened to the analysis device enclosure 2006 about the receiving feature 2014, thereby covering the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004.
  • the lid 2012 may also include a catch 2013 on an underside (shown in phantom in FIG. 21 A).
  • the catch 2013 may be configured to receive some or all of the handle 2033.
  • the lid 2012 may be subsequently rotated relative to the receiving feature 2014 and about the handle 2033. This may cause the lid 2012 to translate the reagent container 2030 further into the analysis device 2004, and facilitate a fluidic connection between the reagent container 2030 and the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004.
  • FIG. 21 B shows the reagent container 2030 removed from the receiving feature 2014 of the analysis device 2004.
  • FIG. 21 B shows the reagent container 2030 removed from the receiving feature 2014 and rotated to show a back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030.
  • the back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030 may be positioned fully within the analysis device 2004 when reagent container 2030 is installed within the receiving feature 2014.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include various openings, vents, conduits, channels, and so forth to facilitate fluidically coupling the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include conduits 2034 positioned at the back plate 2066.
  • Each of the conduits 2034 may be fluidically coupled with an internal chamber of the reagent container 2030 (e.g., such as one of a group of internal chambers separating a first reagent, a second reagent, a waste volume, an air filter, and so forth).
  • the conduits 2034 rather than represent a particular directional flow or chemical compound, may more generally correspond to a passageway or channel that operates to fluidically couple the respective internal chambers with corresponding ones of the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004, for example, when the reagent container 2030 is engaged within the receiving feature 2014.
  • the analysis device 2004 may include fluidic connections 2015 positioned or partially within the receiving feature 2014.
  • Each of the fluidic connections 2015 may be fluidically coupled with corresponding ones of the conduits 2034 of the reagent container 2030, for example, when the reagent container 2030 is engaged within the receiving feature 2014. Fluid may thus flow between the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004 using the fluidic connections 2015 and the conduits 2034.
  • the reagent container 2030 may also include various structures that facilitate alignment of the reagent container 2030 within the receiving feature 2014.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include alignment features 2036 positioned along the back plate 2066.
  • the analysis device 2004 may include corresponding alignment feature 2016.
  • the alignment features 2036 in one embodiment, may be holes, recesses, grooves, and so forth and the corresponding alignment features 2016 of the analysis device 2004 may be cantilevered structures, pins, protrusions, and so forth that are received by the alignment features 2036 when the reagent container 2030 is appropriately positioned within the receiving feature 2014.
  • the reagent container 2030 may also include a computer identification element 2038.
  • the computer identification element 2038 may be an RFID tag, machine readable symbol, and/or other component configured to identify the reagent container 2030.
  • the analysis device 2004 may include a computer identification element reader (not shown in FIG. 21 B) that may identify the reagent container 2030 based on information associated with the computer identification element 2038. This may include a serial number, chemical composition, manufacturing origination, disposal requirements, and so forth.
  • FIGs. 22A and 22B present simplified cross-sectional views of the reagent container of FIG. 21 B, taken along line B-B of FIG. 21 B.
  • FIGs. 22A and 22B depict a group of internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 including reagents, air filters, and/or waste volumes, as may be appropriate for a given application.
  • an embodiment of the reagent container is shown having a first internal chamber 2040a and a second internal chamber 2040b.
  • the first internal chamber 2040a may be configured to hold a first reagent 2041 a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be configured to hold a second reagent 2041 b.
  • the first reagent 2041 a and the second reagent 2041 b may be one or more of MeOH (of various concentrations), a dye, a buffer, a calibrant, a catalyst, and other substantially any other chemical compound that may facilitate the HPLC process performed by the analysis device 2004.
  • the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may each be fluidically coupled with the analysis device 2004, for example, at corresponding fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004.
  • each of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may have a conduit that may define a flow path between the analysis device 2004 and a corresponding one of the first reagent 2041 a, the second reagent 2041 b, and other feature of the respective internal chamber (including a waste volume or air filter, described below with respect to FIG. 22B).
  • the reagent container 2030 may include a first conduit 2034a fluidically coupled with the first internal chamber 2040a and a second conduit 2034b fluidically coupled with the second internal chamber 2040b.
  • each of the conduits may be positioned at or near a bottom portion of the respective internal chamber, which may facilitate fluid flow into and/or from the internal chamber; however, in other cases, other positions for the conduits are possible.
  • the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may also be fluidically coupled with a vent.
  • the vent may allow air (filtered or non-filtered) into a corresponding one of the internal chambers when the fluid is expelled or dispensed (such as being expelled or dispensed from a corresponding one of the fluidically coupled conduits). This may help mitigate vacuum formation within the internal volume when fluid is expelled. Additionally or alternatively, the vent may allow air to exit an internal chamber when fluid is received within the chamber (such as a waste stream of an HPLC process being received at a
  • the reagent container 2030 may include a first opening 2042a fluidically coupled with the first internal chamber 2040a and a second opening 2042b fluidically coupled with the second internal chamber 2040b.
  • the first opening 2042a may define a vent for the first internal chamber 2040a and the second opening 2042b may define a vent for the second internal chamber 2040b.
  • each of the vents may be positioned at or near a top portion of the respective internal chamber, which may facilitate the venting of air into and/or from the internal chamber; however, in other cases, other positions for the vent are possible.
  • the vents may also be positioned laterally offset from a conduit or other fluidic passage that is used to fill and/or empty the contents of the corresponding internal chamber.
  • FIG. 22A depicts a first directional flow valve 2044a and the second directional flow valve 2044b.
  • the first directional flow valve 2044a may be positioned within, or partially within, the first conduit 2034a and operable to control flow into and/or from the first internal chamber 2040a.
  • the second directional flow valve 2044b may be positioned within, or partially within, the second conduit 2034b and operable to control flow into and/or from the second internal chamber 2040b.
  • FIG. 22A depicts a first directional vent valve 2046a and the second directional vent valve 2046b.
  • the first directional vent valve 2046a may be positioned within, or partially within, the first opening 2042a and operable to equalize pressure within the first internal chamber 2040a while maintaining at least a partial fluidic seal.
  • the second directional vent valve 2046b may be positioned within, or partially within, the second opening 2042b and operable to equalize pressure within the second internal chamber 2040b while maintaining at least a partial fluidic seal.
  • an embodiment of the reagent container 2030 is shown having the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b.
  • the reagent container 2030 of FIG. 22B also includes a third internal chamber 2040c and a fourth internal chamber 2004d.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include a third conduit 2034c, a fourth conduit 2034d, a third opening 2042c, a fourth opening 2042d, a third directional flow valve 2044c, a fourth directional flow valve 2044d, and a third directional vent valve 2044d. Redundant explanation of these components is omitted her for clarity.
  • the first internal chamber 2040a may be configured to hold the first reagent 2041 a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be configured to hold the second reagent 2041 b.
  • the first reagent 2041 a may be a distinct chemical compound from that of the second reagent 2041 b held within the second internal chamber 2004b.
  • the first reagent 2041 a may be one of MeOH (of various concentrations), a dye, a catalyst, a calibrant, a buffer, and the second reagent 2041 b may be another one of such chemical compounds.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include further internal chamber for additional reagents, and are described, for example, with respect to FIGs. 23A - 24C.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c may define a waste volume of the reagent container 2030.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c may be substantially unfilled prior to engagement of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c may be fluidically coupled with a waste output of stream of the HPLC process implemented by the analysis device 2004. As multiple iterations of the HPLC process are performed, waste may flow into the third internal chamber 2040c (e.g., via the third conduit 2034c and the third directional flow valve 2044c).
  • the reagent container 2030 may be subsequently removed from the analysis device 2004, thereby allowing for waste disposal.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d may define an air filter volume of the reagent container 2030.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d may include or partially include an air filter 2043.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d may be fluidically coupled with, in one embodiment, an air intake of the HPLC process implemented by the analysis device 2004.
  • the air filter 2043 may be positioned along, or fluidically coupled with, an external environment (e.g., at the fourth opening 2042d).
  • the analysis device 2004 may thus be configured to draw air from the fourth internal chamber 2040d, which causes air to flow from atmosphere (e.g., from the fourth opening 2042d), through the air filter 2043 (thus filtering the atmospheric air), and out of the fourth internal chamber 2040d using the fourth conduit 2034d.
  • the air filter 2043 may be a component of the reagent container 2030, the analysis device 2004 may receive filtered air through a new filter with each subsequent replacement reagent container used with the analysis device 2004.
  • FIGs. 23A and 23B depict the back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030, according to different embodiments.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include various conduits, vents, alignment features, computer identification elements, and/or other features or structures that may facilitate coupling (fluid, mechanical, and/or otherwise) the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004.
  • a back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030 is shown in an assembled configuration.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include eight conduits positioned at the back plate 2066.
  • the reagent container of FIG. 23A includes the first conduit 2034a, the second conduit 2034b, the third conduit 2034c, the fourth conduit 2034d, a fifth conduit 2034e, a sixth conduit 2034f, a seventh conduit 2034g, and an eighth conduit 2034h (collectively referred to herein as “conduits 2034”).
  • the conduits 2034 may generally define a flow path through at least a portion of the back plate 2066 and toward internal chambers of the reagent container 2030.
  • FIG. 23A shows eight separate conduits, other embodiments are possible, including embodiments having more or less conduits.
  • Each of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may be fluidically coupled to one or more of the conduits 2034.
  • each of the conduits 2034 may be fluidically coupled to reagents, waste volumes, air filters, and so forth that may be held or positioned within respective ones of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030.
  • the conduits 2034 may be configured to allow flow into and/or from the reagent container 2030, based on the configuration of the fluidically coupled internal chamber.
  • each of the conduits 2034 may include a directional valve 2050.
  • the directional valve 2050 may generally operate to seal a corresponding one of the conduits 2034 when the reagent container 2030 is disengaged from the analysis device 2004.
  • the directional valve 2050 may also be configured to unseal the corresponding one of the conduits 2034 when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004, thereby allowing the analysis device 2004 to induce flow into and/or out of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030.
  • the reagent container 2030 may generally include two or more internal chambers, each configured to hold distinct reagent chemical compounds. Additional internal chambers may be included in the reagent container 2030 in order to hold further reagents, air filters, waste volumes, and so forth. The number of internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may at least partially depend on the input/output requirements of the chemical processes of the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include an appropriate number of internal chambers so that each and every (or a predetermined subset) of the input/output requirements of the chemical of the analysis device 2004 are met by the reagent container 2030. This may allow the chemical processes of the analysis device 2004 to run substantially unattended, drawing from reagents held within the reagent container 2030 as needed, and, at least substantially analogously, dispensing into the reagent container 2030 as the chemical processes are performed.
  • the embodiment of the reagent container 2030 shown in FIGs. 23A - 24C may include a sufficient number of internal chambers to meet the input/output requirements of the HPLC process performed by the analysis device 2004, described herein.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include at least an internal chamber (and fluidically coupled conduit) for: (i) MeOH 100%; (ii) a buffer; (iii) a waste volume; (iv) a filtered air intake; (v) a dye; (vi) a catalyst; (vii) a calibrant; and (viii) MEOH 40%. While a variety of different configurations are possible, in the embodiment of FIGs.
  • the first conduit 2034a may be fluidically coupled with the MeOH 100% (held within a first internal chamber 2040a)
  • the second conduit 2034b may be fluidically coupled with the buffer (held within a second internal chamber 2040b)
  • the third conduit 2034c may be fluidically coupled with the waste volume (defined at least partially by a third internal chamber 2040c)
  • the fourth conduit 2034d may be fluidically coupled with the filtered air intake (defined at least partially by a fourth internal chamber 2040d)
  • the fifth conduit 2034e may be fluidically coupled with the dye (held within a fifth internal chamber 2040e)
  • the sixth conduit 2034f may be fluidically coupled with the catalyst (held within a sixth internal chamber 2040f )
  • the seventh conduit 2034g may be fluidically coupled with the catalyst (held within a seventh internal chamber 2040g)
  • the eighth conduit 2034h may be fluidically coupled with MeOH 40% (held within an eighth internal chamber 2040h).
  • conduits and internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may not be limited to the configuration above; rather, the conduits and/or internal chambers may be fluidically coupled to an appropriate reagent or volume to perform the various functions of the reagent containers described herein.
  • Each of the conduits 2034 may extend at least partially through the back plate 2066 and into the enclosure 2032 in order to fluidically couple corresponding ones of the internal chambers 2040a - 2040h (collectively referred to herein as“internal chambers 2040”) (not shown in FIG. 23A) with the analysis device 2004.
  • the internal chambers 2040 may be defined by various different internal walls of the enclosure 2032.
  • Each of the internal chambers 2040 may have a distinct size and/or shape configured to define a predetermined volume corresponding to the particular reagent or other feature of a given one of the internal chambers 2040.
  • the internal chambers 2040 may be defined along a surface of the back plate 2066.
  • the back plate 2066 may define the fourth internal chamber 2040d.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d may be a groove, channel, notch, and so forth defined in a surface of the back plate 2066.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d may be sealed from an external environment using a back sealing layer 2048. As described herein, the fourth internal chamber 2040d may be used to provide filtered air to the analysis device 2004.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d may be fluidically coupled with the fourth conduit 2034d and the fourth opening 2042d.
  • An air filter 2043 may be positioned at least partially within one or both of the fourth opening 2042d and/or the fourth internal chamber 2040d. At least one surface of the air filter 2043 may be exposed to ambient air.
  • the fourth conduit 2034d may be configured to fluidically coupled with the analysis device 2004.
  • the analysis device 2004 may be configured to draw air through the air filter 2043 (from an external environment), along vent path V1 through the fourth internal chamber 2040d, and into the analysis device 2004 via the fourth conduit 2034d.
  • the vent path V1 thus represents a flow path through the fourth internal chamber 2040d (below the back sealing layer 2048).
  • FIG. 23A also depicts various structural features of the reagent container 2030 that may facilitate alignment of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container may include a first alignment feature 2036a positioned at the back plate 2066 and a second alignment feature 2036b positioned at the back plate 2066.
  • Each of the first alignment feature 2036a and the second alignment feature 2036b may be recesses or grooves formed in a surface of the reagent container 2030 defined by the back plate 2066.
  • the first alignment feature 2036a may be defined by an elongated shape that is configured to receive an alignment feature of the analysis device 2004 having a corresponding shape.
  • the corresponding elongated shapes of the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004 may limit rotation of the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004.
  • the second alignment feature 2036b may be substantially circular and configured to receive an alignment feature of the analysis device 2004 having a corresponding shape.
  • the corresponding shapes of the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004 may thus facilitate positioning of the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004. It will be appreciated, however, that other shapes and configurations of the alignment features are possible, including embodiments having more or fewer alignment features.
  • the reagent container 2030 may have a perimeter that is at least partially defined by a planar or flat portion.
  • the reagent container 2030 of FIG. 23A includes a perimeter alignment portion 2067.
  • the perimeter alignment portion 2067 may be flat and may correspond to a substantially flat surface or contour of the analysis device 2004. This may indicate to a user the proper orientation of the reagent container 2030 relative to the analysis device 2004, and guide the reagent container 2030 toward the various other alignment features, conduits, tubes, pins, and so forth of the analysis device 2004, as described herein.
  • the back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030 is shown.
  • the back plate 2066 is shown in a configuration in which the back sealing layer 2048 is removed.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d is exposed.
  • each of the internal chambers of the reagent container may be fluidically coupled with a vent.
  • the vent may be an opening in the reagent container 2030 that allows air to enter and/or exit an internal chamber. This may reduce pressure variations within the internal chambers, which may be caused when fluid enters and/or exits a given one of the internal chambers 2040, for example, from a fluidically coupled conduit.
  • each of the vents may be, or include, openings positioned at the back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030.
  • FIG. 23B shows a first opening 2042a, a second opening 2042b, a third opening 2042c, a fourth opening 2042d, a fifth opening 2042e, a sixth opening 2042f, a seventh opening 2042g, and an eighth opening 2042h (collectively referred to herein as the“openings 2042”).
  • the openings 2042 may be fluidically coupled to a corresponding one of the internal chambers 2040. As one possibility, and as shown in greater detail with respect to FIGs.
  • the first opening 2042a may be fluidically coupled with the first internal chamber 2040a
  • the second opening 2042b may be fluidically coupled with the second internal chamber 2040b
  • the third opening 2042c may be fluidically coupled with the third internal chamber 2040c
  • the fourth opening 2042d may be fluidically coupled with the fourth internal chamber 2040d
  • the fifth opening 2042e may be fluidically coupled with the fifth internal chamber 2040e
  • the sixth opening 2042f may be fluidically coupled with the sixth internal chamber 2040f
  • the seventh opening 2042g may be fluidically coupled with the seventh internal chamber 2040g
  • the eighth opening 2042h may be fluidically coupled with the eight internal chamber 2040h.
  • At least some of the openings 2042 may be configured to allowed filtered air into corresponding ones of the internal chambers 2040. This may be facilitated by fluidically coupling some of the openings 2042 with the air filter 2043 using the fourth internal chamber 2040d. For example, ambient air may travel into the fourth internal chamber 2040d through the air filter 2043. Filtered air output from the air filter 2043 may travel along a vent path V2 and toward select ones of the openings 2042. Accordingly, the select ones of the openings 2042 that receive the filtered air along the vent path V2 may be positioned within, or otherwise fluidically coupled with, the fourth internal chamber 2040d.
  • the fourth internal chamber 2040d include: the first opening 2042a, the second opening 2042b, the fourth opening 2042d, the fifth opening 2042e, the sixth opening 2042f, the seventh opening 2042g, and the eighth opening 2042h.
  • the back sealing layer 2048 may seal the fourth internal chamber 2040d from an external environment. As such, ambient air may be drawn into the fourth internal chamber 2040d through the air filter 2043. The filtered air may subsequently travel along vent path V2 and into various ones of the internal chambers 2040 via a corresponding one of the openings 2042 positioned within the fourth internal chamber 2040d.
  • filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the first internal chamber 2040a at the first opening 2042a
  • filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the second internal chamber 2040b at the second opening 2042b
  • filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the fifth internal chamber 2040e at the fifth opening 2042e
  • filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the sixth internal chamber 2040f at the sixth opening 2042f
  • filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the seventh internal chamber 2040g at the seventh opening 2042g
  • filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the eighth internal chamber 2040h at the eighth opening 2042h.
  • filtered air may flow into a particular one of the foregoing internal chambers 2040 when reagent is dispensed from a corresponding ones of the conduits 2034. This may help mitigate vacuum formation within an internal chamber as fluid is dispensed.
  • At least one of the openings may be used to expel air from a fluidically coupled one of the internal chambers (such as when the chamber is being filled with fluid).
  • FIG. 23B shows the third opening 2042c positioned at the back plate 2066.
  • the third opening 2042c may define a vent for the fluidically coupled third internal chamber 2040c.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c may be a waste volume or internal drum of the reagent container 2030 that is operable to receive a waste output of the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004.
  • the third opening 2042c may help relieve pressure within the third internal chamber 2040c, for example, when the third internal chamber 2040c is filled with the waste output.
  • the third opening 2042c is shown as being not fluidically coupled with the air filter 2043. Rather, the third opening 2042c may be fluidically coupled to the analysis device 2004 when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004. This may allow the analysis device 2004 to receive overflow waste from the third internal chamber 2040c, which may help mitigate spilling, for example, where the analysis device 2004 employs a false bottom (e.g., false bottom 1510 of FIG. 18) or other spill containment structure.
  • a false bottom e.g., false bottom 1510 of FIG. 18
  • FIGs. 24A - 24C show exploded views of the reagent container 2030 described herein.
  • FIGs. 24A - 24C show a particular embodiment of the shape and contours of the internal chambers, such as the first internal chamber 2040a, the second internal chamber 2040b, the third internal chamber 2040c, the fourth internal chamber 2040d, the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h, described herein.
  • the internal chambers 2040 are possible, including larger or smaller internal chambers, and thus the embodiments of FIG. 24A - 24C are presented for purposes of illustration only.
  • the enclosure 2032 may generally be an assembly of multiple internal shells, walls, drums, and so forth that are connected to one another to define the various internal chambers described herein.
  • the enclosure 2032 may include the back plate 2066.
  • the back plate 2066 may define a series of holes or openings that house the various vents, conduits, valves, and so forth, as described herein.
  • the enclosure 2032 may also include an inner drum 2060 and an outer cover 2072.
  • the inner drum 2060 may include a group of internal walls that define or partially define that various internal chambers described herein. In some cases, the inner walls may extend along a subset of one or more of a height, a length, or a width of the enclosure 2032. Accordingly, as shown below, one or more internal films, membranes, or other seals may be positioned within or along the inner drum 2060 in order to isolate one or more of the internal chambers 2040 of the enclosure 2032.
  • the outer cover 2072 may generally be positioned over the inner drum 2060. In some cases, one or more of the internal chambers 2040 of the enclosure 2032 may be at least partially defined within the outer cover 2072.
  • the handle 2033, described above with respect to FIG. 20A may be attached to the outer cover 2072.
  • the inner drum 2060 may include internal walls 2062.
  • the internal walls 2062 may be of generally uniform thickness and may cooperate to define various distinct three-dimensional geometries within the inner drum 2060.
  • the internal walls 2062 may cooperate to define at least the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h as being less than one or more of (or all of ) a height dimension, a width dimension, and/or a length dimension of the inner drum 2060.
  • the openings and conduits may be fluidically coupled with the internal chambers shown in FIGs. 24A - 24C.
  • the fifth internal chamber 2040e may be fluidically coupled with the fifth conduit 2034e and the fifth opening 2042e
  • the sixth internal chamber 2040f may be fluidically coupled with the sixth conduit 2034f and the sixth opening 2042f
  • the seventh internal chamber 2040g may be fluidically coupled with the seventh conduit 2034g and the seventh opening 2042g
  • the eighth internal chamber 2040h may be fluidically coupled with the eighth conduit 2034h and the eighth opening 2042h.
  • each of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h may be sealed within the inner drum 2060 by a first inner drum sealing layer 2049a.
  • the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a may extend over ends of certain ones of the internal walls 2062 in order to define an enclosed and isolated volume within the inner drum 2060 for each of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h.
  • the internal walls 2062 may also define the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b within the inner drum 2060.
  • the internal walls 2062 may generally bisect the inner drum 2060.
  • the first internal chamber 2040a may be defined at a first side of the bisection.
  • the second internal chamber 2040b may be defined at a second side of the bisection and at least partially surrounding the group of (or a subset of) the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h.
  • the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h may be sealed within the inner drum 2060 by the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a and thus the second internal chamber 2040b is separated from each of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h by the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a.
  • first internal chamber 2040a may be fluidically coupled with the first conduit 2034a and the first opening 2042a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be fluidically coupled with the second conduit 2034b and the second opening 2042b.
  • each of the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be sealed within the inner drum 2060 by a second inner drum sealing layer 2049b.
  • the second inner drum sealing layer 2049b may extend over ends of certain ones of the internal walls 2062 in order to define an enclosed and isolated volume within the inner drum 2060 for each of the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b.
  • the inner drum 2060 and the outer cover 2072 may cooperate to define the third internal chamber 2040c of the reagent container 2030.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c may be at least partially defined by an inner volume of the outer cover 2072, and bounded within the reagent container 2030 by the second inner drum sealing layer 2049b.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c may be fluidically coupled with the third opening 2042c and the third conduit 2034c, described herein.
  • Each of the third opening 2042c and the third conduit 2034c may be positioned along the back plate 2066.
  • each of the third opening 2042c and the third conduit 2034c may extend from the back plate 2066 and through at least a portion of the inner drum 2060 in order to reach the third internal chamber 2040c.
  • the third conduit 2034c may extend through one or more of the internal walls 2062 of the inner drum 2060 (shown with respect to FIGs. 24A and 24B) and the third opening 2042c may extend at least partially along a periphery of the inner drum 2060.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c may be configured for fluidic coupling along the back plate 2066 (e.g., using the third conduit 2034c and the third opening 2042c) while remaining separated within the reagent container 2030 from the others of the group of internal chambers 2040.
  • FIGs. 25A - 25C depict various cross-sectional details of the reagent container 2030 in an assembled configuration.
  • FIGs. 25A - 25C depict the reagent container 2030 having the group of internal chambers 2040 and the operation of one of more direction valves that may control flow into and/or from a particular internal chamber.
  • FIG. 25A a cross-sectional view of the reagent container of FIG. 24C, taken along section C-C of FIG. 24C is shown.
  • the third internal chamber 2040c is shown as being defined within the outer cover 2072 and separated from the inner drum 2060 by the second inner drum sealing layer 2049b.
  • the second internal chamber 2040b is shown as being defined within the inner drum 2060 and sealed between the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a and the second inner drum sealing layer 2049b.
  • the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a is positioned along ends of the internal walls 2062 and used to seal, within the inner drum 2060, at least the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h.
  • the second internal chamber 2040b may be sealed from and positioned at least partially around (such as being positioned along two, three, four, or more sides) of the group of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h.
  • each of the group of internal chambers 2040 may be fluidically coupled with a conduit.
  • the conduit may include a directional valve.
  • the directional valve may be normally closed, thus sealing a corresponding one of the group of internal chambers 2040 from an exterior environment.
  • the directional valve may unseat and thus define a flow path between the internal chamber and the engaged analysis device.
  • a sample directional valve 2050 is shown.
  • the sample directional valve 2050 may operate to seal a conduit, passage, tube, and so forth in a first mode and unseal the conduit in a second mode, and thereby defining a flow path through the conduit.
  • the sample directional valve 2050 is shown for purposes of illustration as being positioned within the fifth conduit 2034e. Accordingly, the sample directional valve 2050 is described herein as having functionality and structural relationships associated with the fifth conduit 2034e and the associated fifth internal chamber 2040e.
  • sample directional valve 2050 may be positioned within substantially any of the conduits described herein, and thus, any functionality and/or structural relationship described herein with respect to the fifth conduit 2034e and/or the fifth internal chamber 2040e may be substantially analogous to any of the conduits and/or internal chambers described herein. Further, in other embodiments, other implementations of directional valves are possible, and, as such, the sample directional valve 2050 is shown in FIGs. 25A - 25C for purposes of illustration.
  • FIG. 25B detail 1 -1 is depicted of FIG. 25A of the sample directional valve 2050 in a first mode.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be disengaged from an analysis device.
  • the sample directional valve 2050 may be configured to seal the fifth internal chamber 2040e.
  • the sample directional valve may generally include an o-seal 2052 and a deformable plug 2054.
  • the o-seal 2052 may be positioned about a perimeter of the fifth conduit 2034e at an exterior surface of the reagent container 2030.
  • the o-seal 2052 may have a hollow or through portion that extends into the fifth conduit 2034e.
  • the deformable plug 2054 may be positioned within the fifth conduit 2034e and operate to selectively seal the fifth internal chamber 2040e at the o-seal 2052.
  • the deformable plug 2054 may generally include a stopper 2056 and a biasing member 2058.
  • the stopper 2056 may be a plunger or half-dome shape that contacts or is otherwise seated at the o-seal 2052 in order to seal the fifth internal chamber 2040e from an exterior environment.
  • the biasing member 2058 may be attached to the stopper 2056 and define a spring-type member that biases or presses the stopper 2056 toward the o-seal 2052.
  • the biasing member 2058 may bias the stopper 2056 toward the o-seal 2052 with force sufficient to prevent or mitigate fluid flow from the fifth internal chamber 2040e through the fifth conduit 2034e.
  • the biasing member 2058 may be compressed to unseat the stopper 2056 from the o-seal 2052, and thus induce flow into and/or from the fifth internal chamber 2040e.
  • FIG. 25C detail 1 -1 is depicted of FIG. 25A of the directional valve 2050 in a second mode.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be engaged with an analysis device.
  • the directional valve 2050 may be configured to unseal the fifth internal chamber 2040e.
  • the fifth conduit 2034e may receive a fluidic connection 2015 of the analysis device 2004, shown with respect to FIGs. 20 - 21 B.
  • the fluidic connection 2015 may be a hollow tube, pin, or other instrument of the analysis device 2004 that is fluidically connected to one or more processes of the analysis device 2004.
  • the fluidic connection 2015 may be sufficiently rigid such that it may contact the stopper 2056 and translate the stopper 2056 inward into the fifth conduit 2034e.
  • the fluidic connection 2015 may be sufficiently rigid such that it compresses the biasing member 2058, which in turn allows for the translation of the stopper 2056.
  • the stopper 2056 may unseat from the o-seal 2052. This may cause flow to travel into the fifth internal chamber 2040e using the fifth conduit 2034e. At least a portion of the stopper 2056 may include or be defined by a chamfered surface. As such, fluid from (or into) the fluidic connection 2015 may travel around the stopper 2056, through the biasing member 2058, and into the fifth internal chamber 2040e. This may be further facilitated, for example, where the biasing member 2058 is a helically shaped spring member; however, this is not required.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates process 2600. While specific steps (and orders of steps) of the methods presented herein have been illustrated and will be discussed, other methods (including more, fewer, or different steps than those illustrated) consistent with the teachings presented herein are also envisioned and encompassed with the present disclosure.
  • process 2600 relates generally to operating a reagent container with an analysis device.
  • the process 2600 may be used with any of the breath analysis systems, breath analysis devices, and reagent containers described herein, for example, such as breath analysis systems 100, 2000; analysis device 104, 300, 2004; and sample capture assembly 2020, and variations and embodiments thereof.
  • a reagent container may be inserted into the analysis device.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be inserted into the analysis device 2004.
  • the analysis device 2004 may include receiving feature 2014.
  • the receiving feature 2014 may be defined by a similar shape and contour as the reagent container 2030.
  • Various fluidic connections, pins, alignment features, and so forth of the analysis device 2004 may be positioned within the receiving feature 2014. This may allow a user to align a positioned alignment feature and a rotational alignment feature of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include a computer identification element and the analysis device 2004 may be configured to identify information corresponding to the reagent container 2030 using the computer identification element.
  • reagent from a first of a group of internal chambers may be dispensed.
  • the first reagent 2041 a may be dispensed from the reagent container 2030.
  • the first reagent 2041 a may be dispensed from the reagent container 2030 through the first conduit 2034a when the reagent container 2030 is received within the receiving feature 2014 and engaged with one or more alignment features or fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004.
  • the first conduit 2034a may include a deformable plug or valve. Flow may be induced around and/or through this plug when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004.
  • filtered air from a second of a group of the internal chambers may be dispensed.
  • ambient air may be drawn from the fourth opening 2042d and through the air filter 2043. This may cause the fourth internal chamber 2040d to hold a filtered air.
  • filtered air may be dispensed from the fourth internal chamber 2040d and into the analysis device 2004, for example, through the fourth conduit 2034d.
  • waste from the analysis device may be received by a third of a group of the internal chambers.
  • waste from the analysis device 2004 may be received within the third internal chamber 2040c.
  • waste may flow into the third internal chamber 2040c from the third conduit 2034c. This may allow the reagent container 2030 to function as a collection device for the outputs of the chemical processes of the analysis device 2004.
  • the operations 2608 - 2616 may be repeated for a second breath sample.
  • the analysis device 2004 may be configured for multiple, successive analyses of patient breath samples.
  • the analysis device 2004 may be used in a clinical setting in which multiple samples are collected from patients and analyzed using the analysis device 2004 by substantially untrained personnel.
  • the reagent container 2030 may be configured for repeated use, across the multiple breath samples analyzed by the analysis device 2004.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include a quantity of at least a first reagent and a second reagent for the first breath sample and the second breath sample.
  • the analysis device 2004 may operate to determine an aldehyde content of multiple patient breath samples using the same reagent container. This may facilitate use of the analysis device for multiple, successive analyses, for example, by reducing an interval for maintaining or restocking the analysis device 2004 with additional chemical compounds.
  • the reagent container 2030 may include sufficient reagents so that the analysis device 2004 may analyze breath samples of each patient of a clinician on a given day or week, as one possibility.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Biological Materials (AREA)
  • Sampling And Sample Adjustment (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments are directed to a reagent container (1524) for an analysis device (1504). An enclosure (1508) defines a group of internal chambers (1529) that each hold and separate chemical compounds or reagents that are used by the analysis device (1504) to perform a high-pressure liquid chromatography ("HPLC") analysis. One or more of the internal chambers (1529) may be used to receive waste streams from the analysis device (1504). The reagent container (1524) may also include one or more air filters (2043) that may be used to provide filtered air to the analysis device (1504). The analysis device (1504) may be configured for aldehyde detection of multiple, successive breath samples. The reagent container (1524) may include a quantity of reagent and empty waste-stream volume for a predetermined number of the multiple breath samples, after which, a distinct reagent container may be used with the analysis device (1504) for further analyses.

Description

REAGENT CONTAINER FOR AN ALDEHYDE ANALYSIS SYSTEM AND METHOD OF
USE
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
[0001] This Patent Cooperation Treaty patent application claims priority to U.S.
provisional application No. 62/643,412, filed March 15, 2018, and titled“Reagent Container for an Aldehyde Analysis System and Method of Use,” the contents of which are
incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
FIELD
[0002] The described embodiments relate generally to consumables for diagnostic devices and methods of use. More particularly, the present embodiments relate to storing and dispensing multiple chemical compounds, such as methanol, dyes, calibrant, from an integrated consumable structure.
BACKGROUND
[0003] Breath from a patient or user may contain aldehydes that can provide information on the general health and wellness of the patient. Aldehydes in breath (or urine, plasma, or headspace of biopsied cells) may be detected and analyzed to measure oxidation stress, among other characteristics, that may assist in a medical diagnosis of the patient. For example, a high-pressure liquid chromatography (“HPLC”) process may be used to separate and measure relative values of aldehydes contained within breath.
[0004] Accordingly, an HPLC process may use multiple chemical or reagents. The HPLC process may also require filtered air, generate waste, among other requirements. Individual management of the inputs and outputs of the HPLC process may cumbersome and may operate to decrease the safety and reliably of such techniques.
SUMMARY
[0005] Embodiments of the present disclosure are directed to a breath analysis system for determining an aldehyde content of a breath sample.
[0006] In a first aspect, the present disclosure includes a reagent container for an analysis device. The reagent container further includes a first reagent. The reagent container further includes a second reagent. The reagent container further includes an air filter. The reagent container further includes an enclosure having a group of internal chambers separating the first reagent, the second reagent, and the air filter from one another within the enclosure. The reagent container may be configured to be received by the analysis device. Each of the group of internal chambers may be fluidically coupled to a conduit that defines a flow path between the analysis device and a corresponding one of the first reagent, the second reagent, or the air filter.
[0007] In a second aspect, the present disclosure includes a reagent container for an analysis device. The reagent container includes an enclosure configured to be received by the analysis device. The enclosure may have a first internal chamber and a second internal chamber. The reagent container further includes a first directional flow valve positioned along a first flow path extending from the first internal chamber and into the analysis device. The reagent container further includes a second directional flow valve positioned along a second flow path extending from the analysis device and into the second internal chamber In response to flow along the first flow path, the reagent container may be configured to allow air into the first internal chamber. In response to flow along the second flow path, the reagent container may be configured expel air from the second internal chamber.
[0008] In a third aspect, the present disclosure includes a method for operating a reagent container with an analysis device. The method includes a first step of inserting the reagent container into the analysis device. For a first breath sample analyzed by the analysis device, the method includes a second step of dispensing reagent from a first of a group of internal chambers of the reagent container. For the first breath sample, the method further includes the third step of dispensing filtered air from a second of the group of internal chambers of the reagent container. For the first breath sample, the method further includes the fourth step of receiving waste from the analysis device into a third of the group of internal chambers of the reagent container. The method further includes a fifth step of repeating steps two through four for a second breath sample analyzed by the analysis device.
[0009] In addition to the exemplary aspects and embodiments described above, further aspects and embodiments will become apparent by reference to the drawings and by study of the following description.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0010] The disclosure will be readily understood by the following detailed description in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, wherein like reference numerals designate like elements.
[0011] FIG. 1 depicts an analysis device;
[0012] FIG. 2A depicts a breath capture component having a breath sample from a user;
[0013] FIG. 2B depicts the breath capture component of FIG. 2A attached to a cartridge;
[0014] FIG. 2C depicts a breath analysis system having the sample cartridge of FIG. 2B attached to an analysis device; [0015] FIG. 2D depicts the breath analysis system in a configuration corresponding to an analysis of the breath sample;
[0016] FIG. 2E depicts the breath analysis system having a graphical output
corresponding to a detection of chemical compounds within the breath sample;
[0017] FIG. 3 depicts a functional diagram of an analysis device;
[0018] FIG. 4 depicts an illustrative sample capture module of the analysis device;
[0019] FIG. 5 depicts an illustrative mixing module of the analysis device;
[0020] FIG. 6 depicts another embodiment of a mixing module of the analysis device;
[0021] FIG. 7 depicts an illustrative injection module of the analysis device;
[0022] FIG. 8 depicts an illustrative detection module of the analysis device;
[0023] FIG. 9A depicts a first configuration of a control value of the detection module;
[0024] FIG. 9B depicts a second configuration of a control value of the detection module;
[0025] FIG. 9C depicts a third configuration of a control value of the detection module;
[0026] FIG. 10A depicts a detection assembly of the detection module;
[0027] FIG. 10B depicts a brightness-time curve for detecting aldehydes;
[0028] FIG. 10C depicts another embodiment of a detection assembly;
[0029] FIG. 10D depicts a cross-sectional view of the detection assembly of FIG. 10C, taken along section A' - A' of FIG. 10C;
[0030] FIG. 1 1 depicts a sample piping and instrument diagram for the analysis device;
[0031] FIG. 12A depicts a flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG.
1 1
[0032] FIG. 12B depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
FIG. 1 1 ;
[0033] FIG. 12C depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1
[0034] FIG. 12D depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1
[0035] FIG. 12E depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
FIG. 1 1 ;
[0036] FIG. 12F depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
FIG. 1 1 [0037] FIG. 12G depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1 ;
[0038] FIG. 12H depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 1 1 ;
[0039] FIG. 12I depicts another flow path of the sample piping and instrument diagram of
FIG. 1 1 ;
[0040] FIG. 13A depicts another embodiment of a sample piping and instrument diagram for the analysis device;
[0041] FIG. 13B depicts the sample piping and instrument diagram of FIG. 13A indicating component grouping by manifold;
[0042] FIG. 14 depicts a flow diagram for determining an aldehyde content of multiple breath samples;
[0043] FIG. 15 depicts an analysis device having an enclosure and a display;
[0044] FIG. 16 depicts an exploded view of the analysis device and a reagent container;
[0045] FIG. 17 depicts an illustrative connection between the analysis device and the reagent container of FIG. 16;
[0046] FIG. 18 depicts a cross-sectional view of the analysis device of FIG. 15, taken along section A-A of FIG 15;
[0047] FIG. 19 depicts a functional block diagram of a system including an analysis device;
[0048] FIG. 20 depicts another embodiment of a breath analysis system having a reagent container;
[0049] FIG. 21 A depicts an exploded view of the breath analysis system of FIG. 20;
[0050] FIG. 21 B depicts a back plate of the reagent container of FIG. 21 A removed from the analysis device;
[0051] FIG. 22A depicts a simplified cross-sectional view of a reagent container, taken along section B-B of FIG. 21 B;
[0052] FIG. 22B depicts a simplified cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a reagent container;
[0053] FIG. 23A depicts a back plate of a regent container;
[0054] FIG. 23B depicts the reagent container of FIG. 23A having an exposed internal chamber; [0055] FIG. 24A depicts an exploded view of a reagent container;
[0056] FIG. 24B depicts an exploded view of the reagent container of FIG. 24A having a first sealing layer;
[0057] FIG. 24C depicts an exploded view of the reagent container of FIG. 24B having a second sealing layer;
[0058] FIG. 25A depicts a cross-sectional view of the reagent container of FIG. 24C, taken along section C-C of FIG. 24C;
[0059] FIG. 25B depicts detail 1 -1 showing an enlarged view of a portion of the directional flow valve;
[0060] FIG. 25C depicts the directional flow valve of FIG. 25B unseated by a conduit from an analysis device; and
[0061] FIG. 26 depicts a flow diagram of a method for operating a reagent container with an analysis device.
[0062] The use of cross-hatching or shading in the accompanying figures is generally provided to clarify the boundaries between adjacent elements and also to facilitate legibility of the figures. Accordingly, neither the presence nor the absence of cross-hatching or shading conveys or indicates any preference or requirement for particular materials, material properties, element proportions, element dimensions, commonalities of similarly illustrated elements, or any other characteristic, attribute, or property for any element illustrated in the accompanying figures.
[0063] Additionally, it should be understood that the proportions and dimensions (either relative or absolute) of the various features and elements (and collections and groupings thereof) and the boundaries, separations, and positional relationships presented
therebetween, are provided in the accompanying figures merely to facilitate an
understanding of the various embodiments described herein and, accordingly, may not necessarily be presented or illustrated to scale, and are not intended to indicate any preference or requirement for an illustrated embodiment to the exclusion of embodiments described with reference thereto. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0064] The description that follows includes sample systems, methods, and apparatuses that embody various elements of the present disclosure. However, it should be understood that the described disclosure may be practiced in a variety of forms in addition to those described herein.
[0065] The present disclosure describes systems, devices, and techniques related to aldehyde detection and analysis. Aldehydes may include substantially any organic chemical compound characterized by a common (functional) group CHO (carbon, hydrogen, oxygen) structure bonded to an aldehyde group. Aldehydes may be detected and analyzed in breath (or other sample from a patient or user) to provide information on the general health and wellness of the patient. For example, a value (concentration or amount) of an aldehyde group having a particular characteristic, size, weight, or the like (such as an aldehyde designated by a C4, C5, C6, or the like) may be indicative of certain medical conditions or otherwise be used for medical diagnostics. However, a breath sample may be a
heterogeneous mixture having aldehydes of various different designations. Detection may thus involve separating the sample by distinct aldehyde groups, often through sophisticated, multi-step chemical processes that may hinder the adaptability and repeatability of such techniques.
[0066] The breath analysis system of the present disclosure may mitigate such hindrances, thereby allowing for repeated detection of aldehydes by untrained technicians or clinical personnel. The amount and/or concentration of certain aldehydes within a breath sample may be used to diagnose certain health information about a patient or otherwise used in monitoring a patient’s health, including incidences of cancer, tumors, or other malignant tissue within the patient’s body. Further, although embodiments are described herein that analyze a breath sample taken from a patient, other embodiments may analyze different gases or fluids.
[0067] Broadly, an unattended high-pressure liquid chromatography (“HPLC”) process is integrated with an analysis device that converts a patient breath sample into a mobile (liquid) chromatography phase. The HPLC process may separate aldehydes of the mobile chromatography phase, as described herein, and be coupled to a detector that measures a value of the aldehydes according to molecule size. This may allow for an integrated approach that substantially automates aldehyde detection from breath capture to aldehyde score. In other embodiments, aldehydes may be measured, separated, or otherwise determined or distinguished from one another by any suitable chemical property, including sizes, shapes, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicty, charge, polarity, and so on. In this regard, the methods for aldehyde detection disclosed and described in U.S. Patent Application No. 62/539,872, filed August 1 , 2017, and titled“Methods and Systems for Aldehyde Detection,” are hereby incorporated by reference.
[0068] To facilitate the foregoing, the breath analysis system may include various components that cooperate to capture a patient breath sample, elute aldehydes from the breath sample, and determine an aldehyde content, among other functions. In one embodiment, the breath analysis system includes a breath capture component, such as an inflatable bag. A patient may exhale into the bag, causing the bag to inflate and retain a breath sample. The bag may be attachable to a cartridge having a permeable membrane (e.g., a silica or other like material) positioned along an interior flow path. An analysis device of the breath analysis system may be attached to the cartridge and used to pull or otherwise extract the breath sample through the permeable membrane (e.g., using a vacuum pump). The permeable membrane may retain aldehydes as the breath sample is drawn from the breath capture component. A container may be received by the analysis device and include one or more chemical compounds, reagents (e.g., methanol (“MeOH”), buffers, dyes, and/or other items that may facilitate manipulation of the retained aldehydes and detection by the analysis device.
[0069] Broadly, the analysis device may use a group of reagents from the container to determine an aldehyde content of the breath sample. For example, the analysis device may form an elution that captures the retained aldehydes of the permeable membrane. This may be used as an input to an HPLC process, described herein, that separates aldehydes according to molecule size. The analysis device may also include a display configured to depict a graphical output corresponding to a detected value of the separated aldehydes. In some cases, the output of the analysis device may be coupled with another electronic device, including over a wireless or distributed network, to facilitate diagnoses of a medical condition based on the detected aldehydes.
[0070] The analysis device may include various different modules that cooperate to determine the aldehyde content of a breath sample. Each module may be configured to execute one or more functions of a process (or separate processes) that converts the patient breath sample into a mobile (e.g., liquid) chromatography phase and detect aldehydes of the breath sample using an unattended HPLC process. In an embodiment, a sample capture module may elute retained aldehydes of the permeable membrane using one or more reagents from a reagent module, for example, such as by flushing the permeable membrane with MeOH 40% and/or other appropriate reagent or concentration. A mixing module, coupled with the sample capture module, may mix the eluted aldehydes with the same or different reagents of the reagent module to form the mobile chromatography phase. This may involve adding a catalyst, dye, calibrants, and so on to the elution and mixing with air agitation. An injection module, separated and parallel to the mixing module, may form a pressurized combination of a further reagent (e.g., including MeOH 10% - MeOH 100%) from the reagent module and a buffer used to control the concentration of reagent. The mobile chromatography phase output by the mixing module may be directed into the flow path of the pressurized output of the injection module, thereby allowing the injection module to push or pump the mobile chromatography phase through a static or stationary
chromatography phase for aldehyde separation.
[0071] The analysis device may thus also include a detection module coupled with the mixing module and the injection module. The detection module may include a stationary chromatography phase. The stationary chromatography phase may be defined by a column having a high density silica structure. The detection module may be configured to load the mobile chromatography phase in a sample loop coupled with an inlet of the column (e.g., using a control valve, including the multi-position, multi-port valve, described herein) and allow the pressurized output of the injection module to advance the mobile chromatography phase through the silica structure of the column. The pressurized output of the injection module may have a concentration of reagent tuned to allow a particular size or designation of aldehyde through the column. For example, an initial concentration of the reagent may allow the smallest of the aldehyde groups to pass through the column; the concentration may be gradually increased (according to a predefined gradient ramp) to selectively allow increasing sizes of aldehyde groups to pass through. This effectively groups and separates aldehydes by size, so that the column outputs a slug or cluster of aldehydes all having a similar size or characteristic. In some embodiments, each aldehyde group will travel through the column separately without any overlap; in other embodiments, some overlap between aldehyde groups may occur and posts-processing of brightness data (or other data related to aldehyde detection) may be used to separate aldehyde group members from one another.
[0072] The detection module of the analysis device may thus be configured to measure a value (quantity, amount, or the like) of the aldehyde cluster output from the column. As described in greater detail below, the value of aldehydes may be detected using a laser or other excitation source that fluoresces a dye attached to the aldehyde groups as each are emitted from the column. A detector, for example, may measure an increase in brightness of the output of the column to facilitate a determination of an aldehyde content of the breath sample. A processing unit of the analysis device (or of another electronic device) may correlate the detected increase in brightness with a particular aldehyde group size or designation using the gradient ramp produced by the injection module. For example, aldehyde groups having a particular size or designation may progress through the column at a rate according to the gradient ramp controlled by the injection module (e.g., C4 aldehyde may require x seconds to progress through the column, whereas C5 aldehyde may require x + y seconds, and so forth based on the gradient ramp). Accordingly, the detection of fluoresced particles at the output of the column may be associated with the anticipated progression of certain aldehyde groups through the column, and thus used to determine a relative value of each aldehyde group in the breath sample. Put another way, the timing of aldehyde groups passing through the column may be used to determine what particular aldehydes are being detected, while the brightness of each such group may be used to determine an amount or concentration of aldehydes within each group. Thus, embodiments may determine relative and/or absolute concentrations of aldehydes within a user’s breath sample.
[0073] It will be appreciated that the reagent module, breath capture module, mixing module, injection module, detection module, and so on may collectively represent a network of tubes, pumps, valves, sensors, and/or other mechanical components, instrumentation, and devices and so on that are used to perform the various functions of the modules described herein. As described herein, the modules may be self-contained and
interconnected systems within a portable device. As such, rather than discrete systems, the modules may be coupled to one another (e.g., within the analysis device) and use common components of the system (e.g., a given pump or valve may be used to perform functions of both the breath capture module and mixing module based on a configuration of the device, as one possibility). As such, it will be appreciated that various different mechanical components may be used to facilitate the functionality of the modules, and that the following piping and instrument diagrams described herein are presented for explanatory purposes and should not be construed as limiting.
[0074] Reference will now be made to the accompanying drawings, which assist in illustrating various features of the present disclosure. The following description is presented for purposes of illustration and description. Furthermore, the description is not intended to limit the inventive aspects to the forms disclosed herein. Consequently, variations and modifications commensurate with the following teachings, and skill and knowledge of the relevant art, are within the scope of the present inventive aspects.
[0075] FIG. 1 depicts an analysis device 104, such as the analysis device generally discussed above and described in greater detail below. The analysis device 104 may be configured to determine an aldehyde content of a breath sample. For example, the analysis device 104 may include an unattended HPLC process and one or more systems that capture and elute aldehydes of a breath sample and detect aldehydes according to molecule size once separated by the HPLC.
[0076] The analysis device 104 may include an enclosure 108 that forms an exterior surface of the analysis device 104. As shown in FIG. 1 , the enclosure 108 may form a substantially flat or planar bottom with curved or contoured surfaces extending therefrom to define a drum or cylindrical shape. It will be appreciated, however, that the enclosure 108 may form substantially any appropriate shape to define an exterior surface that conceals some or all of the various mechanical systems described herein, and thus FIG. 1 presents one possibility of such shape.
[0077] The analysis device 104 may also include a display 1 12. The display 1 12 may be at least partially positioned within the enclosure 108, such as being positioned at least partially within an opening defined in an exterior surface, and used to depict graphical objects corresponding to the determined aldehyde content or other information of the analysis device. The graphical objects may indicate a status or configuration of the analysis device 104, such as an indication of the analysis device 104 drawing a breath sample, eluting a breath sample, detecting aldehydes, and so on. Additionally or alternatively, the graphical objects may output a score or metric associated with the detected aldehydes, such as a concentration or value of one aldehyde designation relative to another aldehyde designation. In some cases, the display 1 12 may be a touch-sensitive display or otherwise responsive to touch or proximity inputs along the exterior surface of the enclosure 108.
Accordingly, the graphical objects may prompt a user to take certain actions, such as transmitting detection results to another electronic device, providing alerts to medical personnel or other users, performing a device diagnostic, among other possibilities. This may be facilitated by a wireless or hardwired connection between the analysis device 104 and another electronic device or communication network, as described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 18.
[0078] One or more openings may be defined by the enclosure 108 to facilitate receiving a breath sample and determining an aldehyde content using a group of reagents. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 1 , the enclosure may define an opening 1 16. The opening 1 16 may be positioned along an exterior side surface of the analysis device 104. The opening 1 16 may be configured to receive a breath sample, such as along flow path F1 . In particular, and as described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 2A - 2E, the opening 1 16 may be configured to receive at least a portion of a cartridge. The cartridge may have a permeable membrane used to capture aldehydes contained within a breath sample from a user or patient. Breath may thus be drawn through the opening 1 16 and into an interior of the analysis device 104, for example, using a pump positioned within the enclosure 108. The breath sample and retained aldehydes captured by the permeable membrane may be manipulated by various mechanical components, instruments, devices, chemical compounds, and so on concealed by the enclosure 108, in order to facilitate determination of the aldehyde content of the breath sample.
[0079] The enclosure 108 may also conceal a container or set of containers (not shown in FIG. 1 ) that collectively hold or serve as a temporary repository for chemical compounds, including reagents, buffers, dyes, and so on used by the analysis device 104 for aldehyde detection. The container or set of containers may be removable components that hold a quantity or volume of reagents for analysis of multiple breath samples. As such, the analysis device 104 may be used to determine an aldehyde content for multiple different breath samples before replacing containers holding the reagents. This may be beneficial, for example, when the analysis device 104 is used in a clinical setting, or other environment where multiple patient samples are analyzed consecutively. As described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 15, the enclosure 108 may include another opening that receives a container having internal chambers that are configured to hold individual ones of the reagents. When the container is positioned within the analysis device 104, the internal chambers may each be fluidically coupled with a corresponding module or system of the analysis device 104 used to collectively determine the aldehyde content of the breath sample. Thus, the analysis device 104 may include various pumps, tubes, sensors, and so forth, to selectively dispense reagents from the container and into an internal volume of the enclosure 108.
[0080] FIGs. 2A - 2E depict a breath analysis system 100, such as the breath analysis system generally discussed above and described in greater detail below. In particular, FIGs. 2A - 2E depict various components of the breath analysis system 100 undergoing operations associated with aldehyde detection. The breath analysis system 100 broadly includes components that capture breath (air) from a user or patient and determine an aldehyde content or score of the breath sample. As described in the illustrative examples of FIG. 2A - 2E, this may include at least a breath capture component 150, a cartridge 160, and the analysis device 104 described above with respect to FIG. 1 . Other components are possible and described herein, including a cartridge configured to hold or retain one or more reagents. It will also be appreciated that FIGs. 2A - 2E show one sample embodiment of breath capture and elution; other techniques and structures are possible and described herein, including embodiments where some or all of the breath capture component 150 or the cartridge 160 is included within the analysis device.
[0081] FIG. 2A depicts the breath analysis system 100 undergoing a processing step for inflating the breath capture component 150. The breath capture component 150 may be substantially any structure having an internal volume configured to retain breath received from a user or patient. As shown in FIG. 2A, the breath capture component 150 is an inflatable bag. The bag may alternate or transition from a deflated state to an inflated state when air is received through an intake 152. The intake 152 may be, form a component of, or couple with, a mouthpiece, through which a user may engage and exhale through to inflate the bag. For example, FIG. 2A shows a user 120 exhaling into the breath capture component 150 through intake 152. The exhaling user 120 may propagate a breath sample substantially along flow path F2a. As the breath sample continues along the flow path F2a, the breath capture component 150 may inflate and retain the sample for subsequent analysis.
[0082] For example, the breath capture component 150 may also include a check valve, regulator, stopper, cap, or other component to retain or temporarily seal breath within the internal volume. A check valve, for example, may allow a user to repeatedly exhale into internal volume of the breath capture component until the internal volume retains a sufficient quantity of air. In a sample embodiment, the bag may be substantially inflated when it receives at least 10 liters of air from a user. In other cases, more or less than 10 liters may be appropriate and may be tuned in order to deliver a breath sample to the analysis device 104 sufficient for detection of aldehydes.
[0083] FIG. 2B depicts the breath analysis system 100 undergoing a processing step for attaching the breath capture component 150 to the cartridge 160. As described above, the cartridge 160 may include a permeable membrane 162 (shown in phantom) positioned along a flow path within the cartridge. The permeable membrane 162 may be a silica bed or other appropriate structure that allows the breath sample to pass substantially unobstructed. The silica bed may, however, operate to capture or retain aldehydes of the breath sample when the breath sample passes through the permeable membrane. As described in greater detail below, this may allow the aldehydes to be removed from the breath sample and used to form a mobile chromatography phase for subsequent detection of aldehyde content.
[0084] To facilitate the foregoing, the cartridge 160 may include at least a first attachment region 164a and a second attachment region 164b. As shown in FIG. 2B, the first attachment region 164a may be attached to the breath capture component 150, for example, such as to the intake 152. Thus, generally, the breath sample contained within the internal volume of the breath capture component 150 may flow into the cartridge at the first attachment region 164a. At, near, or otherwise fluidically coupled to the attachment region 164, may be one or more check valves, regulators, or the like to prevent breath or other fluid from traversing into the breath capture component 150 from the cartridge 160. [0085] In a sample embodiment, the second attachment region 164b may be used to fluidically couple the cartridge 160 with the analysis device 104. The breath sample may flow through or exit the cartridge 160 from the second attachment region 164b and into the analysis device 104. The second attachment region 164b is shown in FIG. 2B as being opposite an elongated body of the cartridge 160; however, this is not required. In other cases, the second attachment region 164b may be positioned along a side or another end of the cartridge 160. The permeable membrane 162 may generally be positioned between the first attachment region 164a and the second attachment region 164b, so that the breath sample may flow through the permeable membrane 162 as it flows from the first attachment region 164a to the second attachment region 162b. As described in greater detail below, the second attachment region 164b may include or otherwise be fluidically coupled with multiple inlet and/or outlet structures of the analysis device 104, such as, the structure may be used to pull air through the permeable membrane 162, elute aldehydes from the permeable membrane 162, purge or clean internal components of the analysis device 104, among other possibilities.
[0086] FIG. 2C depicts the breath analysis system 100 undergoing a processing step for attaching the cartridge 160 to the analysis device 104. As shown in FIG. 2C, the cartridge 160 may be at least partially positioned in or received by the opening 1 16 defined along an exterior of the enclosure 108. For example, the second attachment region 164b of the cartridge 160 may be advanced into the opening 1 16 and fluidically coupled with one or more inlet and/or outlet structures of the analysis device 104. In other cases, the cartridge 160 may be fluidically coupled with the analysis device 104 using other openings or features in the analysis device 104, including being positioned fully within the enclosure 108, thereby concealing or partially concealing the cartridge 160 and/or the breath capture component 150. The cartridge 160 may be attached to the analysis device 104 while having the breath capture component 150 attached to the first attachment region 164a. Alternatively, the cartridge 160 may be attached to the analysis device 104 in a configuration in which the first attachment region 164a may be substantially uncoupled from the breath capture component 150. The display 1 12 may optionally indicate coupling of the cartridge 160 to the analysis device 104 and/or convey information to a user regarding a prompt or alert for initiation of aldehyde detection of the analysis device 104.
[0087] FIG. 2D depicts the breath analysis system 100 in a configuration corresponding to an initiation of aldehyde detection of the breath sample. For example, the analysis device 104 may initiate a process for detecting an aldehyde content of the breath sample upon coupling of the cartridge 160 (not shown in FIG. 2D) in the opening 1 16 or other component or feature of the analysis device 104. This may be initiated upon a user command or input (such as that received at the display 1 12), or may occur upon a detection of the cartridge 160 and the analysis device 104 (or after a delay, which may be programmable).
[0088] As shown in FIG. 2D, the analysis device 104 may pull the breath sample from the breath capture component 150 along a flow path F2b. The flow path F2b may extend from the breath capture component 150, through the cartridge 160, and into the analysis device 104. The analysis device 104, for example, may include one or more vacuum pumps, or other biasing elements, that draw the breath along the flow path F2b. The flow path F2b may extend through the permeable membrane 162 (not shown in FIG. 2D) that is positioned within the cartridge 160. As the analysis device 104 draws the breath sample along the flow path F2b, aldehydes of the breath sample may be trapped, captured, or otherwise retained by the permeable membrane 162. The captured aldehydes may be representative of the quantity of aldehydes in the breath sample. As such, the retained aldehydes may be eluted and analyzed in order to determine an aldehyde content of the breath sample, according to the various techniques described herein.
[0089] FIG. 2D also shows the display 1 12 having a graphical output 1 15. The graphical output 1 15 may correspond to the configuration of the analysis device 104, such as a configuration in which air is drawn through the permeable membrane 162. The graphical output 1 15 may thus be updatable to convey information associated with other
configurations or operations of the analysis device 104, such as configurations associated with eluting retained aldehydes from the permeable membrane 162, mixing the elution with reagents, including catalysts and dyes, performing an HPLC process, among other configurations.
[0090] FIG. 2E depicts the breath analysis system 100 upon completion of aldehyde detection of the breath sample. Subsequent to the breath sample being drawn through the permeable membrane 162, described above with respect to FIG. 2D, the analysis device 104 may perform various different operations to detect the aldehyde content of the breath sample, described below with respect to FIGs. 3 - 14. This may include, among other operations, forming a mobile chromatography phase from an elution of retained aldehydes, performing an HPLC process, and determining an aldehyde content based on the fluorescence of separated particles. Each of these and other processes of the analysis device 104 may be integrated and streamlined, requiring little, if any, input from a user.
Upon completion, the analysis device 104 may convey information to the user corresponding to the aldehyde content of the breath sample. For example, as shown in FIG. 2E, the display 1 12 may include a graphical output 1 15 that may include one or more symbols, pictures, glyphs, numbers, or the like that represent information concerning the aldehyde content of the breath sample. In one embodiment, the graphical output 1 15 may be a chart (such as a circular or pie chart) having bars or areas corresponding to a value (quantity) of certain aldehyde groups of a given size or designation relative to other aldehyde groups.
For example, the graphical output 1 15 may have an individual area corresponding to a relative value of each of the aldehydes designated C4 - C10. This may allow a user to readily understand the quantity of a particular aldehyde, and discern information relating to the oxidative stress present in the breath sample, for example, by reference to the relative quantities of other aldehydes. In some cases, the graphical output 1 15 may also include an aldehyde score or metric, which may be a composite or derived output based on the relative quantities of the distinct aldehydes detected by the analysis device 104.
[0091] In the embodiment of FIG. 2E, the cartridge 160 (and associated breath capture component 150) is shown attached to the analysis device 104. Subsequent to (or during) the detection of aldehydes by the analysis device 104, the cartridge 160 may be removed from the analysis device 104. In this regard, the analysis device 104 may be further configured to receive another cartridge (having another associated breath capture component) for analysis of further breath samples. For example, in a configuration, internal components of the analysis device 104 may be sanitized, purged, primed and so on in order to detect aldehydes in additional breath samples. Thus, the analysis device 104 may be configured for repeated detection of aldehydes for multiple breath samples, thereby enhancing the adaptability of the analysis device 104 in clinical settings. For example, the analysis device 104, and breath analysis system 100 more generally, may be used in a clinical setting in which breath samples from multiple patients are analyzed for aldehyde content with little to no input from a trained operator.
[0092] FIG. 3 depicts a functional diagram of an analysis device 300. The analysis device 300 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 104 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 2E. Accordingly, the analysis device 300 may be configured to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample. For example, the analysis device 300 may form a mobile chromatography phase having aldehydes captured from a patient breath sample. The aldehydes may be separated through an HPLC process and subsequently detected by molecule size using a detection assembly.
[0093] The analysis device 300 may include various modules or collections of mechanical components, instruments, and so on that collectively operate to perform the functions described herein. For example, and as shown in FIG. 3, the analysis device 300 may include at least a reagent module 310, a sample capture module 320, a mixing module 330, an injection module 340, and a detection module 350. Rather that define discrete or separated mechanical components and instruments, it will be appreciated that the modules may use common or overlapping components and instruments to perform the functions herein. For example, a given pump, value, or other element may be used to perform a function of the sample capture module 320 in a first configuration, a function of the mixing module 330 in a second configuration, a function of the detection module 350 in a third configuration, and so forth. Accordingly, the individual modules discussed with respect to FIG. 3 are used to facilitate an understanding of the analysis device 300, and are not meant as limiting or demarcating specific mechanical components or instruments as performing an isolated function. As such, the compounds described below with respect to FIGs. 4 - 121 are presented as one possible implementation of the modules described with respect to FIG. 3, and are not meant as limiting.
[0094] The reagent module 310 may include some or all of the chemical compounds used by the analysis device 300 for detection of the aldehyde content of a breath sample.
For example, the reagent container may include MeOH 40%, MeOH 100%, a buffer, a calibrant, a catalyst, a dye, and/or other chemical compounds that may be selectively used by various other modules of the analysis device 300 in order to facilitate aldehyde detection of the breath sample. The reagent module 310 may include a quantity of each of these, or other chemical compounds sufficient for the analysis device 300 to detect aldehydes of multiple successive breath samples. Thus, while the reagent module 310 may be a removable component coupled within the analysis device 300, it may be used across multiple analyses of the analysis device 300. The reagent module 310 may also include various other components that may facilitate aldehyde detection of the analysis device 300, including one or more filters (for filtered air intake) and a waste receptacle, among other components and features. These too may be used for multiple successive breath sample analyses and may be tuned or calibrated according to a limiting quantity of one or more of the chemical compounds. For example, the waste receptacle may be substantially full when one or more of the chemical compounds is substantially consumed by a predetermined amount of breath sample analyses.
[0095] To facilitate the foregoing, the reagent module 310 may be fluidically coupled with each of the other modules of the analysis device 300. As shown in the non-limiting example of FIG. 3, the reagent module 310 may be fluidically coupled with each of the sample capture module 320, the mixing module 330, the injection module 340, and the detection module 350. In particular, an illustrative reagent path 31 1 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the sample capture module 320, an illustrative reagent path 312 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the mixing module 330, an illustrative reagent path 313 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the injection module 340, and an illustrative reagent path 314 is shown fluidically coupling the reagent module 310 and the detection module 350. It will be appreciated that rather than depict a particular flow path or direction, or particular chemical compound or fluid, the illustrative reagent paths are shown to generally depict fluidic coupling. Each of the reagent paths may include connections for multiple different chemical compounds (or air intake exhaust, etc.) to and/or from the respective modules and which may operate at different times based on a given configuration of the analysis device 300. Accordingly, each of the modules described herein may include, or be fluidically coupled with, pumps, valves, instruments, and so on that may selectively dispense chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 when used to facilitate the performance of a particular operation of the analysis device 300.
[0096] FIG. 3 also shows the sample capture module 320. The sample capture module 320 may be used to capture aldehydes from a breath sample (e.g., on a silica bed) and elute the captured aldehydes. The elution may be transferred to the mixing module 330, as described below, to form a mobile chromatography phase having aldehydes from the breath sample.
[0097] Broadly, the sample capture module 320 may receive a breath sample at flow 321 . The flow 321 may be received from, for example, a breath capture component (breath capture component 150 of FIG. 2A) or other device (or the patient) and contain aldehydes. The sample capture module 320 may initiate the flow 321 using a vacuum pump or other biasing component that draws the breath sample through a permeable membrane (silica bed). Accordingly, the sample capture module 320 may output the breath sample at flow 322. When the breath sample exits the sample capture module 320 at the flow 322, it may be free of a representative sample of aldehydes (including free of substantially all aldehydes), for example, which may have been captured by the permeable membrane of the sample capture module 320.
[0098] The sample capture module 320 may be further configured to form an elution having the aldehydes captured by the permeable membrane. For example, the sample capture module 320 may initiate a flow of reagents or other chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 (e.g. , using the reagent path 31 1 ) that elutes the permeable membrane. For example, a MeOH 40% reagent may be used to substantially dissolve the reagents (or a representative sample thereof) from the permeable membrane in order to form an elution (liquid) containing aldehydes of the breath sample. This elution having the aldehydes of the breath sample may be output to the mixing module 330 at flow 323.
[0099] The mixing module 330 may be configured to receive the elution at flow 323 and form a mobile (liquid) chromatography phase. Broadly, to facilitate the foregoing, the mixing module 330 may obtain multiple, different chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 along the reagent path 312. This may include, without limitation, a calibrant, a catalyst, and a dye. The calibrant may be a standardized solution having a known aldehyde content of a particular molecule size or designation. This known aldehyde content may be used as a baseline or reference point for determining the relative aldehyde content of other particular aldehyde groups of designations contained within the breath sample. The catalyst may be used to facilitate a chemical reaction that forms the mobile chromatography phase from the elution and other chemical compounds from the reagent module 310. The dye may be a fluorescent compound responsive to radiation, such as from a laser. The dye may attach to aldehydes within the mixing module 330 and used as an indicator (marker) of a presence of aldehydes once separated within the detection module 350.
[0100] Each of the foregoing chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 may be mixed with the elution within a mixing volume of the mixing module 330, described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 5 and 6. The chemical compounds may be added to the elution in any appropriate manner, including sequentially or in combination, and may be added prior to or during the filling of the mixing volume with the elution. The mixing module 330 may mix the elution with the chemical compounds using air agitation or bubbles that percolate through the contents of the mixing volume. The bubbles may be drawn from the atmosphere through a filter of the reagent module 310. For example, when the mixing volume is filled, the mixing module 330 may initiate air flow along one or both of the reagent paths 31 1 or 312 that draws air through a filter contained within the reagent module 310 and into the mixing volume. It will be appreciated, however, that in some cases the filter may be a separate component of the analysis device 300 and need not necessarily be associated with the reagent module 310. Alternatively, the filter may be optional. Further, in other cases, the elution and chemical compounds may be mixed by other techniques, including mechanical agitation, thermal mixing, among other techniques. Notwithstanding, upon completion of the mixing, the mixing module 330 is configured to output the mobile chromatography phase formed within the mixing volume at flow path 324. As described below, the mobile chromatography phase of the flow path 324 is advanced through the detection module 350 by an output of the injection module 340, whereat the aldehyde content may be detected using the HPLC and optical detection.
[0101] Separated from, and parallel to, the mixing module 330, the injection module 340 may therefore be configured to form a pressurized flow that is used to advance the mobile chromatography phase through the detection module 350. The pressurized flow may include at least a reagent and a buffer received from the reagent module 310 along the reagent path 313. The buffer may control a concentration of the reagent, which may be variable based on a predefined gradient ramp. For example, and as described in greater detail below, the concentration of the reagent may increase as the mobile chromatography phase is advanced through the detection module. This increase in concentration may allow for progressively larger aldehyde molecules to propagate through a column or other separation instrument or structure of the detection module 350, effectively separating the aldehydes of the mobile chromatography phase by molecule size.
[0102] To facilitate the foregoing, the injection module 340 may include two high pressure pumps, operating in parallel, that each draw a respective one of the reagent and the buffer from the reagent module 310. The output of each of such parallel high pressure pumps may be combined at a static mixing tee and output to the detection module 350 along flow 325. Alternatively, the reagent and buffer may be combined according to selectively controlled ratios before a single high pressure pump that produces the flow 325. In either case, the injection module 340 may also be configured to monitor a status of the high pressure pumps (e.g., using an in line flow meter, or other instrument) in order to detect a cavitation of depressurization event. As explained in greater detail below, upon detection of such depressurization, the analysis device 300 may trigger a diagnostic or other configuration to prime the pumps or otherwise repressurize the flow 325.
[0103] The detection module 350 may use the flow 324 from the mixing module 330 and the flow 325 from the injection module 340 to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample. In a first configuration, the detection module 350 may be configured to load a sample loop with the mobile chromatography phase output from the mixing module 330 at the flow 324. For example, one or more pumps may draw the mobile chromatography solution from the mixing volume into a sample loop. The sample loop may be fluidically coupled with a control valve, such as a multi-position, multi-port value, described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 8- 9C. Accordingly, in a second configuration, the detection module 350 may be configured to rotate or reposition the sample loop (using the control valve) in order to fluidically couple the sample loop with the pressurized output of the injection module 340 using the flow 325.
[0104] Upon coupling with the pressurized output of the injection module 340, the detection module 350 may be configured to separate aldehydes of the mobile
chromatography phase according to molecule size. For example, the detection module 350 may include a column or other separation structure or device having a high-density silica bed (stationary chromatography phase). The high-density silica bed may generally impede the propagation of aldehydes therethrough. However, with the aid of the pressurized output from the injection module 340, the mobile chromatography phase may be advanced through the column and separated according to molecule size or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, and so on).
[0105] For example, the advancement of aldehydes through the column may at least partially depend on the chemical composition of the pressurized output of the injection module 340. For example, the pressurized output of the injection module 340 may include a reagent having a concentration controlled by a buffer and an initial reagent concentration that allows the smallest of the aldehyde groups of designations to progress through the column. This concentration, for example, may correspond to a concentration of reagent used to elute the aldehydes from the permeable membrane (e.g., MeOH 40%); however, other concentrations and reagents may be used. The concentration of the reagent may be increased over time according to a gradient ramp (e.g., by dynamically altering a
reagent/buffer ratio). Accordingly, the gradient ramp may be a curve that defines the concentration of the reagent over a duration of the HPLC process. Generally, this concentration increases at a rate that allows the concentration of the reagent to progress from the initial MeOH 40% to a final concentration of at or near MeOH 100%. The rate, however, may be variable or otherwise non-constant as may be appropriate to facilitate the separation of aldehydes within the column. And as the concentration of reagent increases, progressively larger aldehydes may propagate through the column.
[0106] Aldehyde groups of certain sizes or designation may thus pass through the column in groups (slugs, clusters, etc.) when the concentration of reagent in the pressurized output of the injection module reaches a designated value. In this regard, the gradient ramp may be controlled to allow the various aldehyde groups to pass through the column separated from one another (in bands) to aid in detection of relative aldehyde content at an output of the column. In this manner, when aldehydes are detected at the output of the column, a processing unit of the analysis device 300 (or another electronic device) may associate the detected aldehydes with a certain aldehyde designation (e.g., C4, C5, C6, etc.) based on an anticipated propagation time of the aldehyde group through the column, as determined by the gradient ramp and increasing concentration of reagent in the pressurized output from the injection module 340.
[0107] The detection module may be configured to measure an output of the column to detect aldehydes. In one embodiment, the detection module may be configured to optically detect aldehydes. In particular, the output of the column may be hit by an excitation source (such as radiation from a laser). As described above, the fluorescent may be attached to a phosphorescent dye. As such, when passed through a path of the excitation source, the dye may fluoresce, and thus indicate a presence of aldehydes. The detection module 350 may therefore be configured to detect an increase in brightness of the output of the column. As one possibility, the output of the column may extend between the excitation source (laser) and a detector. The detector may include, or be coupled with, a band-pass or other filter, thereby allowing the detector to register an optical signal in response to fluorescence of the dye. In some cases, the optical signal may correspond to a value of the increase in brightness, and thus be used to determine a relative quantity of a detected aldehyde (e.g., by comparing a brightness value for a given aldehyde group with other brightness values for other aldehyde groups. This signal from the detector may thus be processed to determine the foregoing and communicate to a user a determined aldehyde content of the breath sample (e.g., using one or more graphical outputs of a display). As previously mentioned, some embodiments may employ different modes of detection and/or separation of aldehydes, including other chemical or physical properties, such as size, shape, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, charge, polarity, and so on.
[0108] As shown in FIG. 3, the detection module 350 may also be fluidically coupled with the reagent module 310, for example, through reagent path 314. For example, the detection module 350 may output a waste stream to the reagent module 310. This may include the mobile chromatography phase output from the column, along with any other chemical compounds or gasses that result from the operation of the detection module 350.
[0109] FIG. 4 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the sample capture module 320. The various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 4 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the sample capture module 320 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 4 is intended to cover alternatives, modifications, and equivalents of the sample capture module 320 consistent with the teachings herein.
[0110] FIG. 4 shows a breath capture component 404. The breath capture component 404 may be substantially analogous to the breath capture component 150 described above with respect to FIGs. 2A - 2E. As such, the breath capture component 404 may be configured to hold a breath sample. The breath capture component 404 may be coupled with a cartridge 408. The cartridge 408 may be substantially analogous to the cartridge 160 described above with respect to FIGs. 2A - 2E. As such, the cartridge 408 may include a permeable membrane 412 positioned along an internal flow path. The permeable membrane 412 may be a silica bed configured to retain aldehydes when the breath sample passes through the cartridge 408. A directional valve 410 (check valve, regulator, or the like) may be positioned along a flow path between the breath capture component 404 and the cartridge 408. The directional valve 410 may substantially prevent flow into the breath capture component 404, including the flow of reagents, solvents, and/or other chemical compounds that may be used to flush or propagate through the cartridge 408 subsequent to aldehyde capture. A multi-position valve 414 (three-way value) may be positioned along a flow path extending from an outlet of the cartridge 408. The multi-position valve 414 may be used to alternate a flow path at the outlet of the cartridge 408 between an exhaust (and associated drip pan) of the analysis device 300 and the mixing module 330. [0111] For example, in a first configuration, the multi-position valve 414 may be configured to route flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 toward an exhaust 416. When the multi-position valve 414 is in the first configuration, flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 may be substantially blocked from proceeding to the mixing module 330. The exhaust 416 may be open to atmosphere or otherwise to allow fluid (air) to exit the sample capture module 320. The exhaust 416 may be coupled with or positioned near a pan 420. The pan 420 may be a drip pan that is used to collect liquids emitted at the exhaust 416. The pan 420 may collect, for example, water or other fluids, present in a breath sample.
[0112] A pump 424 may be used to draw the breath sample held within the breath capture component 404 through the cartridge 408 and toward the exhaust 416. The pump 424 may be a vacuum pump or other suitable pump that may deflate the breath capture component 404 and pull the breath sample through the permeable membrane 412. The pump 424 may have a variable flow rate controlled by the analysis device 300. In one embodiment, the pump 424 may have a flow rate of 3 L/min.; however, this may be adjusted up or down. A flow instrument 428 may be fluidically coupled with the pump 424. The flow instrument 428 may be an inline flow meter, but other instruments are possible as well, including a pressure gauge that detects a value associated with an output of the cartridge 408. The flow instrument 428 may be used to monitor propagation of the breath sample through the permeable membrane 412, including flow rate. As such, the pump 424 may, in certain embodiments, operate at least partially based on an output or signal from the flow instrument 428. For example, when the flow instrument 428 detects a certain value (such as that corresponding to a substantial evacuation of the breath sample from the breath capture component 404), the pump 424 may cease operation. This may also cause the sample capture module 320 to initiate elution of aldehydes from the permeable membrane 412, as described herein.
[0113] In a second configuration, the multi-position valve 414 may direct flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 to the mixing module 330 (not shown in FIG. 4) along flow path F4 which may be received by the mixing module 330. This may occur subsequent to the operation of the pump 424 that pulls the breath sample from the breath capture component 404 to the exhaust 416 (for aldehyde capture at the permeable membrane 412). When the multi-position valve 414 is in the second configuration, flow from the outlet of the cartridge 408 may be substantially blocked from proceeding to the exhaust 416. Accordingly, this may allow the sample capture module 320 to propagate an elution to the mixing module 330 for further processing .
[0114] To facilitate the foregoing, the sample capture module 320 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents from the reagent module 310 that may facilitate in forming an elution. As described above with respect to FIG. 3, the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and/or other compounds or structures. Shown in FIG. 4 are possible chemical compounds and filters that may be fluidically coupled with the sample capture module 320. It will be appreciated, however, that the sample capture module 320 may be fluidically coupled with more or fewer items of the reagent module 310. Further, reagent module 310 may include additional chemical compounds and structures, for example, such as those described below with respect to FIGs. 5 - 8.
[0115] In the embodiment of FIG. 4, the sample capture module 320 is fluidically coupled with a first sample capture reagent 432, a second sample capture reagent 436, and a sample capture filter 440. The first sample capture reagent 432 may be MeOH 40%, the second sample capture reagent 436 may be MeOH 100%, and the sample capture filter 440 may be an air filter, such as a carbon-based filter; however, other chemical compounds and structures are possible. Broadly, the first sample capture reagent 432 may be used to elute retained aldehydes from the permeable membrane 412. The second sample capture reagent 436 may be used to clean or sanitize internal components of the sample capture module 320 (and other fluidically connected module), for example, which may occur between breath analyses. The sample capture filter 440 may be used as an air intake for air agitation by the mixing module 330, air drying of internal components of the sample capture module 320, among other functions.
[0116] One or more valves, pumps, and/or other components or instruments of the sample capture module 320 may operate to selectively dispense the chemical compounds from the reagent module 310. As shown in FIG. 4, the sample capture module 320 may include a multi-position valve 450. The multi-position valve 450 may be used to establish a flow of reagent into the sample capture module 320 that alternates between the first sample capture reagent 432 and the second sample capture reagent 436. For example, when the multi-position valve 450 is in a first configuration, the first sample capture reagent 432 may flow into the sample capture module 320. Conversely, when the multi-position valve 450 is in a second configuration, the second sample capture reagent 436 may flow into the sample capture module 320.
[0117] Flow of the first sample capture reagent 432 and the second sample capture reagent 436 may be initiated or controlled by a pump 454. The pump 454 may be a fixed volume (displacement) pump that is configured to dispense a predefined volume of the respect reagents into the sample capture module 320 (e.g., as may be calibrated in micro liters). The pump 454 may be fluidically coupled with the cartridge 412 using a multi-position valve 458. The multi-position valve 458 may be configured to alternate an output of the pump 454 between a flow path that extends through the cartridge 408 (and through the permeable membrane 412) and another flow path that bypasses the cartridge 468 and proceeds to the exhaust 416 and/or the mixing module 330 (e.g., based on a configuration of the multi-position valve 414).
[0118] The pump 454 may also be used to draw air into the sample capture module 320. As shown in FIG. 4, the pump 454 may be fluidically coupled to the sample capture module 320 (and associated sample capture filter 440) using a multi-position valve 462. The multiposition valve 462 may be used to alternate an intake of the pump 454 between air from the sample capture filter 440 and one or both of the first sample capture reagent 432 and the second sample capture reagent 436. In this regard, when the multi-position valve 462 is in a first configuration, the pump 454 may operate to pump substantially liquid chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 and into the sample capture module 320.
Conversely, when the multi-position valve 462 is in a second configuration, the pump 454 may operate to pump substantially gaseous fluids (e.g., filtered air) from, or as filtered through, the reagent module 310 and into the sample capture module 320.
[0119] As described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 1 1 - 121, the foregoing components and instruments may allow the sample capture module 320 to capture aldehydes from a breath sample, form an elution of the retained aldehydes, and clean or purge internal components of the sample capture module 320 or analysis device 300 more generally. For example, operation of the pump 424 may cause a breath sample held within the breath capture component 404 to progress through the directional valve 410, the cartridge 408 (and permeable membrane 412), multi-position valve 414, flow instrument 428, pump 424, and exhaust 416. This may allow the permeable membrane 412 to capture aldehydes from the breath sample. Subsequently, operation of the pump 454 may cause the first sample capture reagent 432 to progress through the multi-position valve 450, the multiposition valve 462, the pump 454, the multi-position valve 458, the cartridge 408 (and permeable membrane 412), the multi-position valve 414, and along the flow path F4 toward the mixing module 330. This may allow the sample capture module 320 to form an elution having the aldehydes of the breath sample that is delivered to the mixing module 330 for further processing into the mobile chromatography phase. Other modes or operations are contemplated and described herein, for example, such as using the pump 454 to dispense the second sample capture reagent 436 for cleaning or sanitizing of the sample capture module 320, among other appropriate functions.
[0120] FIG. 5 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the mixing module 330. The various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 5 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the mixing module 330 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 5 is intended to cover alternatives,
modifications, and equivalents of the mixing module 330 consistent with the teachings herein.
[0121] The mixing module 330 may be configured to form a mobile chromatography phase that contains aldehydes from a breath sample. The mobile chromatography phase may be propagated through a stationary chromatography phase of the detection module 350, described herein, to detect an aldehyde content of the breath sample.
[0122] To facilitate the foregoing, the mixing module 330 may receive the flow F4 from the sample capture module 320. The flow F4 may include an elution having the aldehydes of the breath sample, as described above with respect to FIG. 4. Broadly, the elution may be advanced into a mixing volume 504 and mixed with one or more chemical compounds to form the mobile chromatography phase. For example, the mixing module 330 may be configured to advance air into the mixing volume 504 that agitates the elution and the one or more chemical compounds. Agitation from the air may mix the elution and the chemical compounds to form the mobile chromatography phase. The mobile chromatography phase may be advanced out of the mixing module 330 along a flow path F5 to the detection module 350.
[0123] To facilitate the foregoing, the mixing module 330 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents or other chemical compounds from the reagent module 310 that may facilitate in forming a mobile chromatography phase from the elution. As described above with respect to FIG. 3, the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and/or other compounds or structures. Shown in FIG. 5 are possible chemical compounds and filters that may be fluidically coupled with the mixing module 330.
It will be appreciated, however, that the mixing module 330 may be fluidically coupled with more or fewer items of the reagent module 310. Further, reagent module 310 may include additional chemical compounds and structures, for example, such as those described herein with respect to FIGs. 4 and 6 - 8.
[0124] In the embodiment of FIG. 5, the mixing module 330 is fluidically coupled with a first mixing reagent 550, a second mixing reagent 554, a third mixing reagent 558, a first mixing filter 562, and a second mixing filter 566. The first mixing reagent 550 may be an internal standard or calibrant (having a known or predetermined aldehyde content), the second mixing reagent 554 may be a catalyst, the third mixing reagent 558 may be a dye (such as a fluorescent dye), and the first and second mixing filters 562, 566 may be air filters, such as a carbon-based filters; however, other chemical compounds and structures are possible. Broadly, the first mixing reagent 550 may include a known value of aldehydes. This known value may be used to establish a baseline or calibrated curve, by which other detected aldehydes of the breath sample may be compared. The second mixing reagent 554 may be used to initiate or accelerate a chemical reaction that forms the mobile chromatography phase from the elution. The third mixing reagent 558 may bond or attach to aldehydes within the elution. The dye may be responsive to radiation (e.g., such as increasing in brightness), thereby allowing for optical detection of aldehydes. The first mixing filter 562 may be used as an air intake for air agitation by the mixing volume 504.
The second mixing filter 562 may be used as air intake for the mixing volume 504, for example, when the mobile chromatography phase is drawn from the mixing volume and along the flow path F5, among other functions.
[0125] One or more valves, pumps, and/or other components or instruments of the mixing module 330 may operate to selectively dispense the chemical compounds from the reagent module 310. As shown in FIG. 5, the mixing module 330 may include a first mixing pump 508. The first mixing pump 508 may be configured to dispense the first mixing reagent 550 into a flow that propagates into the mixing volume 504. The mixing module 330 may further include a second mixing pump 512. The second mixing pump 512 may be configured to dispense the second mixing reagent 554 into a flow that propagates into the mixing volume 504. The mixing module 330 may further include a third mixing pump 516. The third mixing pump 516 may be configured to dispense the third mixing reagent 558 into a flow that propagates into the mixing volume 504.
[0126] The first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and the third mixing pump 516 may each be fixed volume (displacement) pumps configured to dispense a certain and controlled quantity of the respective mixing reagents into the elution. Other types of pumps may be used, including other fixed volume pumps, or pumps that may allow a predefined volume of fluid to pass for a given pump stroke or cycle. As shown in FIG. 5, the first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and the third mixing pump 516 may introduce the respective mixing reagents into a flow of the elution as it propagates into the mixing volume 504. This may allow for premixing of the mixing reagents with the elution prior to mixing within the mixing volume 504 (e.g., using air agitation described below). In other cases, however, the mixing reagents may be introduced into the mixing volume 504 along a separate path from that of the elution. For example, mixing reagents and the elution may be introduced into the mixing volume 504 separately, including through distinct openings in the mixing volume 504, in other embodiments.
[0127] Each of the first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and the third mixing pump 516 may dispense a corresponding one of the mixing reagents independent from one another. In this regard, the pumps may be tuned to control a flow rate of the mixing reagents into the elution, according to various parameters of the mobile chromatography phase. In one embodiment, the first mixing pump 508 may be calibrated to dispense 45 microliters of the first mixing reagent 550 into the elution as it flows toward the mixing volume 504. The second mixing pump 512 may be calibrated to dispense 45 microliters of the second mixing reagent 554 into the elution as it flows toward the mixing volume 504. The third mixing pump 516 may be calibrated to dispense 150 microliters of the third mixing reagent 558 into the elution as it flows toward the mixing volume 504. In other cases, more or less of the first mixing reagent 550, the second mixing reagent 554, and the third mixing reagent 558 may be added to the elution as may be appropriate to form the mobile chromatography phase.
[0128] The mixing module 330 may also include a fourth mixing pump 520. The fourth mixing pump 520 may be used to advance air into the mixing volume 504 for air agitation.
For example, the fourth mixing pump 520 may be configured to draw air from atmosphere (and through the fluidically coupled first filter 562 of the reagent module 310) and direct the air toward the mixing volume 504. Upon entry, and as described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 6, the air may bubble, percolate, or otherwise flow through the liquid solution held within the mixing volume 504. This may agitate or mix the liquids to facilitate formation of the mobile chromatography phase within the mixing volume 504.
[0129] As described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 1 1 - 121, the foregoing components and instruments may facilitate operation of the mixing module 330 to receive an elution and mixing reagents, mixing the elution and mixing reagents, and flow a mobile chromatography phase formed from the elution and the reagents toward the detection module 350. For example, a gas sensor 524 (bubble detector) may detect introduction of the elution into the mixing module 330 along the flow path F4. This may initiate mixing reagent flow from one or more of the first mixing pump 508, the second mixing pump 512, and/or the third mixing pump 516, thereby allowing the first mixing reagent 550, the second mixing reagent 554, the third mixing reagent 558, and the elution to flow into the mixing volume 504. Subsequent to (or at least partially concurrent with) filling the mixing volume 504, the fourth mixing pump 520 may initiate a flow of air in the mixing volume 504, thereby causing air agitation within the mixing volume 504 that is used to form the mobile chromatography phase. The mixing volume 504 may be fluidically coupled with a multiposition valve 528. This may allow the mobile chromatography phase to exit the mixing volume 504 and flow along the flow path F5, for example, toward the detection module 350. The mixing volume 504 may also be fluidically coupled with the second filter 566. This may allow air from the atmosphere to be drawn into the mixing volume 504 as the mobile chromatography phase exits the mixing volume 504 and proceeds along the flow path F5. [0130] FIG. 6 depicts another embodiment of the mixing module 330 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 and 5. In particular, FIG. 6 shows the mixing module 330 having a mixing volume 604. The mixing volume 604 may be substantially analogous to the mixing volume 504 described above with respect to FIG. 5. For example, the mixing module 604 may be configured to receive multiple mixing reagents and an elution (containing aldehydes) and form a mobile chromatography phase.
[0131] To facilitate the foregoing, the mixing volume 604 may be defined by angled sidewalls 674. The angled sidewalls 674 may extend away from a mixing opening 675 positioned at the bottom of the mixing volume 604. Accordingly, the angled sidewalls 674 may define a cone or contoured shape that expands outward from a bottommost portion of the mixing volume 604.
[0132] The angled sidewalls 674 that define the cone may facilitate mixing or air agitation. For example, FIG. 6 shows the mixing volume 604 in a configuration in which a solution 680 is contained therein. The solution 680 may be some combination of mixing reagents and elution that are combined to form the mobile chromatography phase. Air 682 (or other gas) may be introduced into the mixing volume 604 (from a flow path F6) through the mixing opening 675 and allowed to flow or percolate through the solution 680. In some cases, at least a portion of the air 682 may flow along the angled sidewalls 674, which may facilitate air agitation of the solution 680.
[0133] FIG. 6 also depicts the mixing volume 604 fluidically coupled with one or more structures of the reagent module 310. In the embodiment of FIG. 6, the reagent module 310 is shown as having a mixing filter 660 and a receptacle 670. However, as described above, the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds and structures. As such, structures in the reagent module 310 depicted in FIG. 6 are shown to illustrate one or more functions of mixing volume 604 and are not meant as limiting.
[0134] The mixing filter 660 may be an air filter fluidically coupled with the mixing volume 604 using a direction valve 662. The mixing filter 660 may be used to filter atmospheric air that may be drawn into the mixing volume 604 during one or more operations of the mixing module 330 (e.g., evacuating the mixing volume 604). The direction valve 662 may be a check valve or regulator that substantially prevents backflow or flow into the filter 660 from the mixing volume 604. The receptacle 670 may be a container, bin, vessel, or the like that captures an output of the mixing module 330, or the analysis device 300 more generally.
The receptacle 670 may be fluidically coupled with the mixing volume 604 using a directional valve 672. The directional valve 672 may be a check valve or regulator that substantially prevents backflow or flow into the mixing volume 604 from the receptacle. [0135] FIG. 7 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the injection module 340. The various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 7 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the injection module 340 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 7 is intended to cover alternatives,
modifications, and equivalents of the injection module 340 consistent with the teachings herein.
[0136] The injection module 340 may be configured to form a pressurized combination of an injection reagent and a buffer. The pressurized combination may be output to the detection module 350 along a flow path F7. A concentration of the injection reagent may be tunable based on a flow rate of one or both of the injection reagent and the buffer as pumped along a direction toward the flow path F7. This concentration of the injection reagent may at least partially control the separation of the various distinct aldehydes groups of designations (e.g., C4, C5, C6, and so on), as described herein.
[0137] To facilitate the foregoing, the injection module 340 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents from the reagent module 310 that may facilitate forming a pressurized combination for use with the detection module 350. As described above with respect to FIG. 3, the reagent module 310 may include multiple chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and/or other compounds or structures. Shown in FIG. 7 are possible chemical compounds and filters that may be fluidically coupled with the injection module 340. It will be appreciated, however, the mixing module 330 may be fluidically coupled with more or fewer items of the reagent module 310. Further, reagent module 310 may include additional chemical compounds and structures, for example, such as those described herein with respect to FIGs. 4 - 6 and 8.
[0138] In the embodiment of FIG. 7, the injection module 340 is fluidically coupled with a first injection reagent 750, and a second injection reagent 754. The first injection reagent 750 may be a reagent, such as MeOH 100% and the second injection reagent 754 may be a buffer. The concentration of the first injection reagent 750 may be reduced or otherwise controlled by the second injection reagent 754, as described herein (e.g., such as reducing MeOH concentration from 100% to 40%, or lower, based on the buffer).
[0139] One or more valves, pumps, and/or other components or instruments of the injection module 340 may operate to selectively dispense the chemical compounds from the reagent module 310. As shown in FIG. 7, the injection module 340 may include a first injection pump 708. The first injection pump 708 may be configured to dispense the first injection reagent 750 into a flow that propagates along the flow path F7. The injection module 340 may further include a second injection pump 712. The second injection pump 712 may be configured to dispense the second injection reagent 754 into a flow that propagates along the flow path F7. Both of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may be substantially high pressure pumps configured to increase pressure within (pressurize) and input flow. In one example, both of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may output flow at 2,000 pounds-per-square inch (psi). In other cases, the output may be more or less than 2,000 psi (including as high as 10,000 psi, or higher) and which may be variable based on a configuration of the analysis device 300. Further, it will be appreciated that the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may operate to produce output having different pressures and/or different flow rates, as may be appropriate to produce the gradient ramp, described herein.
[0140] The first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 may combine at a static mixing tee 716. The static mixing tee 716 may include an interior feature that facilitates blending of the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 (e.g., including an internal protrusion); however, this is not required. The first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 may exit the static mixing tee 716 as a substantially combined flow that forms the pressurized combination output along the flow path F7.
[0141] A flow instrument 728 (including an in-line flow meter, or other gauge or instrument) may detect a flow rate of the pressurized combination output from the static mixing tee 716, or more generally, from the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712. An output or signal of the flow instrument 728 may be transmitted to a processing unit of the analysis device 300 (or of another electronic device). This signal may be used to control or regulate one or more functions of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712, such as adjusting a flow rate and/or pressurized output in order to maintain a desired output along the flow path F7. The flow instrument 728 may also be used to detect a depressurization event of the injection module 340. This may occur, for example, when one or both of the first injection pump 708 or the second injection pump 712 cavitates or otherwise interacts with gasses (e.g., such as those trapped within the injection reagents. Such gasses may mitigate or prevent the pumps from maintaining adequate pressure along the flow path F7. Upon detection of depressurization, and as explained in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 8 and 9, the analysis device 300 may transition into a configuration that primes or otherwise allows for fluid flow through the pumps.
[0142] As described herein, the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may cooperate to form a pressurized combination having a concentration of reagent along a gradient ramp. For example, one or both of the flow rate (or other characteristic) of the first injection pump 708 and the second injection pump 712 may be modified in order to gradually increase a concentration of the reagent in the pressurized combination over time.
It will be appreciated that while the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 are shown in FIG. 7 as being mixed or combined after pumping, in other cases the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 may be combined with one another before pumping. For such embodiment, a single pump may be used to pressurize the combination of the first injection reagent 750 and the second injection reagent 754 for transfer to the detection module 350.
[0143] FIG. 8 depicts sample components and instruments that may cooperate to implement and perform one or more functions of the detection module 350. The various components and instruments described herein with respect to FIG. 8 are presented to facilitate an understanding of the detection module 350 and are not meant as limiting. To the contrary, the described embodiment of FIG. 8 is intended to cover alternatives, modifications, and equivalents of the detection module 350 consistent with the teaching herein.
[0144] The detection module 350 may be configured to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample. In particular, the detection module 350 may be configured to propagate a mobile (liquid) chromatography phase (containing aldehydes from the breath sample) through a stationary chromatography phase (high-density silica) in order to separate the aldehydes by molecule or group size or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, and so on). The detection module 350 may also be configured to detect a value for each of the separated aldehydes using an excitation source (laser) to fluoresce dye attached to the aldehydes.
[0145] To facilitate the foregoing, the detection module 350 may include a control valve 804. Broadly, the control valve 804 may be configured to direct a mobile chromatography phase (e.g., from the mixing module 330) into a flow of a pressurized combination (e.g., from the injection module 340) that may operate to advance the mobile chromatography phase through the stationary chromatography phase. The control valve 804, as described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 9A - 9C, may include multiple ports (such as seven ports shown in FIG. 8). Particular ones of the multiple ports may be fluidically coupled to one another based on a configuration or position of the control valve 804. This may allow for operation of the control valve 804 in a first configuration to receive a volume of the mobile chromatography phase. In a second configuration, the control valve 804 may allow the volume of the mobile chromatography phase to be directed into a flow path of a pressured combination of flow that advances the mobile chromatography phase toward a column or other structure of an HPLC process. And in a third configuration, the control valve 804 may allow one or more fluid flows (e.g., such as the pressurized combination) to flow to waste, for example, as may be used to facilitate priming cavitated pumps of the injection module 340.
It will be appreciated that while the control valve 804 described herein may be a seven-port, three-configuration valve, other valves may be used to implement the functions of the detection module 350 described herein, including a six-port, two-configuration valve, or other appropriate valve that may route an output of the mixing module to an output of the injection module.
[0146] In the embodiment of FIG. 8, the control valve 804 may receive the mobile chromatography phase from the mixing module 330 along the flow path F5 at a port 1 . The control valve 804 may be coupled with a sample loop 808 that is fluidically coupled with a port 3 and port 6 of the control valve 804. The sample loop 808 may have an internal volume that is tunable to a desired volume of the mobile chromatography phase for separation by the HPLC process. For example, the sample loop 808 may have a volume of 800 microliters; however, in other cases the sample loop 808 may have a volume of more or less than 800 microliters. In a first configuration of the detection module 350, the sample loop 808 may be filled with the mobile chromatography phase. To facilitate the foregoing, the detection module 350 may include a detection pump 812. The detection pump 812 may be fluidically coupled to the control valve 804 at a port 2. The detection pump 812 may thus cause the mobile chromatography phase to flow from the port 1 to the port 3, fill the sample loop 808, and from the port 6 to the port 2. Excess volume of the mobile chromatography phase may flow, in one embodiment, to the reagent module 310, such as to receptacle 890. The receptacle 890 may be fluidically coupled to an output of the detection pump 812 and may be substantially analogous to the receptacle 670 described above with respect to FIG.
6. Fluidically coupled with the detection pump 812 may also be a gas sensor 816 (bubble detector). The gas sensor 816 may be used to detect the presence of gas or liquid at an inlet (or outlet) of the detection pump 812. In this regard, the gas sensor 816 may be used to detect a filling status of the sample loop 808. For example, when the gas sensor 816 no longer detects gas, or detects a minimal amount, or drop in gas content, the sample loop 808 may be substantially filled with the mobile chromatography phase. As such, the gas sensor 816 may be used to initiate a change in configuration of the control valve 804 (e.g., to the second configuration of the detection module 350) where the mobile chromatography phase within the sample loop 808 is directed toward a separation column and into a flow of the pressured combination.
[0147] The control valve 804 may receive a pressurized combination of reagent and buffer at a port 5, such as along the flow path F7 from the injection module 340. In a second configuration of the detection module 350, the port 5 may be fluidically coupled with the port 6 and the port 3 may be fluidically coupled with the port 4. As such, the pressurized combination received by the control valve 804 at the port 5 may advance the mobile chromatography phase out of the sample loop and toward a column 820. The column 820 may define a stationary chromatography phase of the HPLC process. For example, the column 820 may include one or separation substrates 824 (such as one or more layers of high-density silica) or other appropriate material. The separation substrates 824 may be permeable structures that impede advancement of aldehydes through the column 820. For example, and as described herein with respect to FIG. 3, the separation substrates 824 may permit advancement of aldehydes having a certain group or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, and so on) at least partially based on a flow pressure at an inlet of the column 820 and a concentration of reagent (e.g., the pressurized combination received at the port 5). Both the low pressure and the reagent concentration may be controlled by the injection module 340 described above with respect to FIG. 7, and thus the injection module 340 may be used to selectively advance certain aldehydes through the column at specified time intervals. As such, molecules of a given aldehyde group may be advanced through, and output from the column, clustered with molecules of other like aldehyde groups. The cluster of molecules of like aldehyde groups may be separated from other, distinct aldehyde groups by a time interval as controlled by the injection module 340. Accordingly, aldehyde content may be measured at an output of the column and associated with a relative quantity of a particular aldehyde group.
[0148] To facilitate the foregoing, the detection module 350 may include a detection assembly 828. The detection assembly 828, as described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 10A and 10B, may be configured to detect aldehydes at an output of the column 820. Broadly, the detection assembly 828 may include an excitation source (laser) and an optical detector, not shown in FIG. 8. The excitation source may expose the output of the column 820 to radiation, thus causing the dye attached to the aldehyde groups to fluoresce. This fluorescence may be detected by the detection assembly 828 and used to determine a relative value of a given aldehyde at the output of the column 820. The optical detector may generally measure a brightness of one or more aldehydes or aldehyde groups, although other detectors may measure other physical or chemical characteristics.
[0149] The detection module 350 may also include a regulator 832. The regulator 832 may be fluidically coupled to an output of the detection assembly 828. The regulator 832 may be a pressure regulator that is configured to maintain a minimum pressure at the output of the detection assembly 828. In this regard, the regulator 832 may be a pressure regulator that allows flow therethrough when a threshold pressure is satisfied. The regulator 832 may thus prevent the output of the detection assembly 828 from venting directly to atmospheric pressure, which may help reduce gas formation with the detection assembly 828. [0150] As shown in FIG. 8, the control valve 804 also includes a port 7. In a third configuration of the detection module 350, the port 5 may be fluidically coupled with the port 7. In this regard, in the third configuration, the control valve 804 may direct the pressurized combination of the flow F7 to the port 7 and toward the reagent module 310 (such as toward the receptacle 890). This third configuration may be used to prime the injection pumps described above with respect to FIG. 7. For example, upon a detection of a depressurization of the pressured combination output by the injection module 340, the control valve 804 may be operated in the third configuration. This may reduce static pressure at the output of the pumps (e.g., by venting the pumps to atmospheric or near atmospheric pressure), and thereby help prime the pumps with the appropriate reagent and pressurize the output. Once primed, the control valve 804 may return to one of the first configuration or the second configuration of the detection module 350, as may be appropriate for a given application.
[0151] FIGs. 9A - 9C depict various configurations of a control valve 904. The control valve 904 may be substantially analogous to the control valve 804 described above with respect to FIG. 8. For example, the control valve 904 may be a multi-position, multi-port valve that is used to direct a mobile chromatography phase (e.g., from the mixing module 330) into a flow of a pressurized combination (e.g., from the injection module 340) that may operate to advance the mobile chromatography phase through a stationary chromatography phase.
[0152] To facilitate the foregoing, the control valve 904, as shown in FIGs. 9A - 9C, may have seven ports. Particular ones of the seven ports may be fluidically coupled with one another based on a configuration or position of the control valve 904. In one embodiment, the control valve 904 may alternate or transition between the respective configurations or positions in order to, for example, redirect or transfer a defined volume of fluid from a first flow or process (e.g., a relatively low pressure flow) into a second flow or process (e.g., a relatively high pressure flow). For example, FIGs. 9A - 9C show a sample loop 908 having a defined volume that may be fluidically coupled with the control valve 904 in order to facilitate redirection or transfer of fluid between a relatively low pressure flow and a relatively high pressure flow. To facilitate the foregoing, the control valve 904 may be operated to allow the sample loop 908 to be filled in a first configuration using an output from a relatively low pressure flow and subsequently transferred in a second configuration to a relatively high pressure flow. The control valve 904 may further be operated in other configurations, including bypassing the sample loop 908, as described herein.
[0153] With reference to FIG. 9A, a control valve 904 is shown. In the first configuration 900a, the control valve 904 may be operated to load or fill the sample loop 908. The sample loop 908 may be filled using a flow F9a received by the control valve 904 at a first port. The flow F9a may include a chemical compound, solution, mobile chromatography phase, and so on, that is directed into the sample loop 908 when the control valve 904 is in the first configuration 900a. For example, when the control valve 904 is in the first configuration 900a, the first port may be fluidically coupled with a sixth port of the control valve 904. The sample loop 908 may be fluidically coupled to the sixth port and a third port of the control valve 904. Accordingly, when the control valve 904 is in the first configuration 900a, the flow F9a received at the first port may flow to the sixth port and fill the sample loop 908. The third port may be fluidically coupled with a second port of the control valve 904. Thus, the control valve 904 may output a flow F9b at the second port based on the sample loop 908 filling from the flow F9a received at the first port of the control valve 904.
[0154] In the embodiment of FIG. 9A, the flow F9a may generally correspond to an output from a mixing module, such as the mixing module 330 described herein with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8. The output of the mixing module 330 may be a mobile chromatography phase that contains aldehydes of a patient breath sample. The output may be a substantially low pressure output. The flow F9b may be fluidically coupled with a pump, such as the detection pump 812, described herein with respect to FIG. 8. Accordingly, suction or biasing from the pump (along the flow path F9b) may cause or initiate flow of the mobile chromatography phase along F9a and through the first port, the sixth port, the third port, and the second port, thereby filling the sample loop 908 with the output of the mixing module 330. One or more sensors (not shown in FIG. 9A) may detect or monitor filling of the sample loop 908. This may be used to trigger a subsequent configuration of the control valve 904.
[0155] With reference to FIG. 9B, a second configuration 900b of the control valve 904 is shown. In the second configuration 900b, the control valve 904 may be operated to insert or redirect sample loop 908 into another flow, such as a high pressure flow. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the control valve 904 may receive a flow F9c at a fifth port. The flow F9c may be a high pressure or other flow that is distinct from the flow F9a received by the control valve 904 at the first port (e.g., such as the pressurized combination output by the injection module 340 of FIG. 7). When the control valve 904 is in the second configuration 900b, the fifth port may be fluidically coupled with the sixth port. As described above, the sample loop 908 may be fluidically coupled with the sixth port and the third port of the control valve 904. Accordingly, when the control valve 904 is in the second configuration 900b, the flow F9c received at the fifth port may flow to the sixth port and through the sample loop 908. The third port may be fluidically coupled with a fourth port of the control valve 904. Thus the control valve 904 may output a flow F9d at the fourth port based on the sample loop 908 filling from the flow F9c received at the fifth port of the control valve 904. [0156] As described above with respect to FIG. 9A, the sample loop 908 may be filled with a chemical compound or other substance received at the first port of the control valve 904 (e.g., a mobile chromatography phase). Thus, the control valve 904 may introduce the flow F9c into the substance contained within the sample loop 908 in the second
configuration 900b. This may cause the contents of the sample loop 908 to exit the control valve 904 along the flow path F9d.
[0157] In the embodiment of FIG. 9B, the flow F9c may generally correspond to an output of an injection module, such as the injection module 340 described herein with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8. The output of the injection module 340 may be a pressurized combination of reagent and buffer. Correspondingly, the exit flow F9d may generally correspond to an inlet of a column or separation structure, such as the column 820 described with respect to FIG.
8, that may be used as a stationary chromatography phase of an HPLC process. The second configuration 900b may therefore be used to advance a substance or compound held by the sample loop 908 toward an inlet of a column. In this regard, where the sample loop 908 includes the mobile chromatography phase, the second configuration 900b may cause the pressurized combination (of the injection module 340) to flow from the fifth port, to the sixth port, through the sample loop 908 to the third port, to the fourth port, thereby causing the mobile chromatography solution to exit the control valve 904 at the flow F9d and toward the column.
[0158] With reference to FIG. 9C, a third configuration 900c of the control valve is shown. In the third configuration 900c, the control valve 904 may be operated to direct the flow F9c to a waste receptacle or otherwise vent to atmospheric or near atmospheric pressure. For example, in the third configuration 900c, the fifth port may be fluidically coupled to a seventh port of the control valve. A flow F9e may exit the control valve 904 at the seventh port, which, in certain embodiments, may function as a vent or relief of the flow F9c. The third configuration 900c also allows the flow F9c to bypass or otherwise flow through the control valve 904 without traversing the sample loop.
[0159] In the embodiment of FIG. 9C, the flow F9e may be coupled with a receptacle, such as receptacle 890 described with respect to FIG. 8, or other component that may serve as a vent or collection structure for waste fluids. As described with respect to FIG. 8, the third configuration 900c may allow the analysis device 300 to repressurize an output (pressurized combination of reagent and buffer) of the injection module 340. For example, in the event that one or more pumps of the injection module 340 cavitates or depressurizes, the third configuration 900c of the control valve may be triggered. By venting an output of the pumps to atmospheric or near atmospheric pressure, static pressure at the output of the pumps may be reduced, thereby helping to prime the pumps or otherwise pressurize the output.
[0160] FIG. 10A depicts a detection assembly 1028. The detection assembly 1028 may be substantially analogous to the detection assembly 828 described above with respect to FIG. 8. For example, the detection assembly 1028 may be configured to detect aldehydes output from a column (e.g., column 820 of FIG. 8). In particular, the detection assembly 1028 may detect an increase in brightness of particles that flow between an emitter (laser) and a detector. The emitter may radiate or impart energy to the particles that causes fluorescent ones of the particles (e.g., a fluorescent dye) to fluoresce (e.g., increase in brightness). Aldehydes may be attached or bonded to the fluorescent dye, and thus the detected increase in brightness may be associated with the presence of aldehydes. In some cases, the detection assembly 1028 may measure a degree or intensity of the increase in brightness of aldehydes (or aldehyde groups). This may be compared with a baseline brightness value (e.g., of a sample having a known aldehyde content) to determine the relative or absolute quantity or concentration of a given aldehyde sample.
[0161] To facilitate the foregoing, the detection assembly 1028 may include an emitter 1058. The emitter 1058 may be a laser, light, or other excitation source configured to emit energy (e.g., electromagnetic radiation) toward a flow of particles. For example, the emitter 1058 is shown in FIG. 10A as emitting an output 1062 of electromagnetic radiation. The output 1062 may generally correspond to a laser or radiation beam that is emitted from the emitter 1058. The detector 1066 and the emitter 1058 may be positioned along opposing sides of the particle flow such that the particle flow passes between the emitter 1058 and the detector 1066 and through the output 1062 of electromagnetic radiation (e.g., through a beam emitted by the emitter 1058).
[0162] The detector 1066 may be an optical sensor (e.g., a CCD or a CMOS sensor) that measures changes in light; however, this is not required. In other embodiments, the detector 1066 may be another sensor responsive to aldehydes, configured to measure or detect various physical and/or chemical properties of aldehydes, or otherwise configured to measure changes in concentrations of aldehyde groups within a flow path. In the embodiment of FIG. 10A, changes in light measured by the detector 1066 may be associated with fluorescing of a dye attached to aldehydes in a flow of particles between the detector 1066 and the emitter 1058. In one embodiment, the detector 1066 may receive and/or detect the output 1062 from the emitter 1058, as well as any optical phenomena due to the particles and/or fluorescence in the flow path, and generate a signal in response to the received and/or detected phenomena. In some cases, for example, the detector 1066 detects an increase or change in brightness (or color or other phenomena) caused by the fluorescence of the dye.
[0163] In some cases, the detector 1066 may be coupled with, or include, a filter 1070, such as a band-pass or other filter. The filter 1070 may be tuned in order to expose the detector 1066 to a set band of wavelengths (e.g., such as those corresponding to the expected wavelength of fluorescing dye), but otherwise block light or other radiation from the emitter 1058. This may allow the detector 1066 to detect light produced by the fluorescence of particles, but otherwise block or reduce the brightness (or amount) of radiation from the emitter 1058 that is incident on the detector 1066.
[0164] To illustrate, in one embodiment, the emitter 1058 may be a laser. The laser may be configured to produce the output 1062. The output 1062 may be a beam having a predefined wavelength, such as 520 nanometers; however, other wavelengths are possible. The filter 1070 may be configured to allow energy having a range of certain wavelengths to pass therethrough. For example, the filter 1070 may allow wavelengths of greater than 520 nm to 540 nm to pass therethrough. Other wavelengths may be substantially blocked. The range of certain wavelengths allowed to pass through the filter 1070 may generally correspond to a wavelength of energy emitted by fluorescing particles, and the wavelength of energy blocked by the filter 1070 may generally correspond to a wavelength of energy of the output 1062. Accordingly, when the detector 1066 detects light through the filter 1070, the detected light may be substantially only light from the fluoresced particles, thus reducing or eliminating the effect of the output 1062 on the detection of the aldehyde content within the flow.
[0165] The detection assembly 1028 may include a housing 1074. The housing 1074 may generally be used to support the emitter 1058 and the detector 1066 within the detection assembly 1028 relative to a flow of particles. In one embodiment, particles may flow through the housing 1074 along or within a through portion 1075. The through portion 1075 may be a fully or partially transparent passage or conduit of the housing 1074 that extends along a path substantially between the emitter 1058 and the detector 1066. This may allow the emitter 1058 to direct the output 1062 toward the through portion 1075 in order to fluoresce particles contained therein. The detector 1066, positioned along the through portion 1075 opposite the emitter 1058, may register or detect the corresponding changes in brightness caused by the fluoresced particles.
[0166] In a sample embodiment, the through portion 1075 may be configured to receive a flow F10a. The flow F10a may be an output from a column (e.g., column 820 of FIG. 8) or other separation structure of an HPLC process that contains aldehydes of a patient breath sample. Accordingly, as described above with respect to FIG. 8, the flow F10a may include clusters of distinct aldehyde groups that are separated from one another. In the embodiment of FIG. 10A, the flow F10a may include a first aldehyde group cluster 1050a, a second aldehyde group cluster 1050b, and a third aldehyde group cluster 1050c, each of which may be directed by the through portion 1075 within the housing 1074 and expelled at a flow F10b. Each of the first aldehyde group cluster 1050a, the second aldehyde group cluster 1050b, and the third aldehyde group cluster 1050c may include a fluorescent dye. As such, when a given one of the aldehyde group clusters passes through the output 1062, the detector 1066 may detect a fluoresce of the dye.
[0167] The housing 1074 may also include various other structures that help facilitate the operation of the detection assembly 1028. For example, the housing 1074 may define a heat sink 1078. The heat sink 1078 may be fins or other structures configured to radiate heat away from the emitter 1058. This may help reduce excess heat in the detection assembly 1028, which may enhance the reliability and longevity of various components of the analysis device, including the detector 1066. Other structures may be defined by the housing 1074 too, such as those configured to receive and/or position the emitter 1058 relative to the detector 1066.
[0168] FIG. 10B depicts a brightness-time diagram 1080. The brightness-time diagram 1080 depicts a sample output from the detector 1066 or other detector of the detection assembly 1028 described with respect to FIG. 10A. In particular, the brightness-time diagram 1080 depicts a curve 1082 that represents a brightness of light detected by detector 1066. The brightness may correspond to fluoresced light, such as that emitted by a fluorescent dye when hit by an excitation source, or otherwise impacted from radiation.
[0169] The brightness-time diagram 1080 may include a brightness axis 1084 and a time axis 1086. The brightness axis 1084 may generally represent a property of the light that is detected by the detector 1066. The property of the light may correspond to an intensity of light (e.g., degree of brightness) detected by the detector 1066 as measured over a period of time, represented by the time axis 1086. As described above with respect to FIG. 10A, clusters of like aldehyde groups may flow through a through portion 1075 (e.g., a tube) that is proximate the detector 1066 (e.g., such as within a field of the detector 1066) and fluoresce when hit by the emitter 1058 with radiation. Accordingly, the curve 1082 may include multiple peaks that represent an increase in brightness caused by the fluorescence of multiple distinct clusters of aldehyde groups. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 10B, the curve 1082 may include a first peak 1088a, a second peak 1088b, and a third peak 1088c, each of which may correspond to an increase in brightness or radiation measured by the detector 1066 from a distinct aldehyde cluster. [0170] To illustrate, and with reference to FIG. 10A, the first peak 1088a may generally correspond to the first aldehyde group cluster 1050a, the second peak 1088b may generally correspond to the second aldehyde group cluster 1050b, and the third peak 1088c may generally correspond to the third aldehyde group cluster 1050c. In this regard, the first peak 1088a may represent an increase in brightness (or other property or phenomena) measured by the detector 1066 when the output 1062 is incident on the first aldehyde group cluster 1050a, the second peak 1088b may represent an increase in brightness (or other property or phenomena) measured by the detector 1066 when the output 1062 is incident on second aldehyde group cluster 1050b, and the third peak 1088c may represent an increase in brightness (or other property or phenomena) measured by the detector 1066 when the output 1062 is incident on the third aldehyde group cluster 1050c.
[0171] Broadly, each of the respective peaks of the curve 1082 may be associated with a particular aldehyde group or designation (e.g., aldehyde C4, C5, C6, etc.) based on the occurrence of the peak for a given time (e.g., as represented by the time axis 1086). For example, as described above with respect to FIGs. 3 and 8, the aldehyde group cluster may pass through the column 820 of FIG. 8 at specified intervals based on various process factors, including the pressurized output of, for example, the injection module 340 of FIGs. 3 - 8. These process factors may be controlled or tuned in order to anticipate a time, order, sequence, and/or other distinguishable pattern of aldehyde group cluster propagated from the column 820.
[0172] As a non-limiting illustration, the process factors may be tuned such that aldehyde group clusters of increasing molecule size (e.g., C4, C5, C6) are emitted from the column 820 and separated from one another by an interval of 30 seconds. A processing unit of the analysis device 300 (or of another electronic device) may therefore associate each of the peaks of the curve 1082 with an aldehyde group cluster based on a processing time measured along the time axis 1086. This may allow the analysis device 300 to determine, continuing the non-limiting illustration, that the first peak 1088a corresponds to a C4 aldehyde, the second peak 1088b corresponds to a C5 aldehyde, the third peak 1088c corresponds to a C6 aldehyde, and so on, as one example. In other cases, the peaks of the curve 1082 may correspond to other aldehyde groups or designations based on the value of the respective peak relative to the time axis 1086.
[0173] An amplitude of a peak of the curve 1082 (e.g., the first peak 1088a, the second peak 1088b, the third peak 1088c) may be analyzed to determine a relative value (quantity, amount, concentration) of the associated aldehyde group cluster. For example, the curve 1082 may be integrated relative to each of the detected peaks to determine a value of each of the associated aldehyde group clusters. While the peaks of the curve 1082 are shown in FIG. 10B as having similar amplitude for the purposes of the illustration, it will be appreciated that a patient breath sample may have peaks of varying or distinct amplitudes, and thus each value of the associated aldehyde group cluster may be different from one another. These values may be compared with a baseline or calibrant in order to determine a relative aldehyde content of each of the detected aldehyde group clusters. For example, one or more of the aldehyde group clusters may be associated with, or derived from, a calibrant (e.g., as described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8). The calibrant may have a known or standardized aldehyde content of a certain aldehyde group, such as an aldehyde group that is distinct from that which may be found in a patient breath sample. This calibrant may be added to the mobile chromatography phase, separated through the HPLC process, and detected by the detector 1066. The amplitude of the peak associated with the aldehyde group cluster (from the calibrant) may serve as a reference point for determining a relative concentration or aldehyde content of the other detected aldehydes. This relative concentration may be output to a user (e.g., using graphical outputs) and transmitted to another electronic device to assist in diagnosing certain medical conditions. In some cases, the analysis device 300 may determine an aldehyde score or other composite or derived metric using some or all of the relative concentrations.
[0174] FIG. 10C depicts a detection assembly 1090, which may be an embodiment of the detection assembly 1028 of FIG. 10A, and may include the same, similar, and/or analogous components, and/or may provide the same, similar, and/or analogous functions as the detection assembly 1028. The detection assembly 1090 may include a housing 1091 that may substantially enclose and support operational components of the detection assembly 1090, such as an emitter, a detector, an optical assembly, and other electronics, components, fluid paths, and the like. The housing 1091 may be an embodiment of the housing 1074 described above with respect to FIG. 10A. The housing 1091 may include a heat sink feature 1092 (e.g., thermally conductive fins) that may be thermally coupled to one or more components within the housing 1091 , such as a power converter, an emitter (e.g., a laser), a detector, or the like, and may help draw waste heat away from such components. The housing 1091 , or portions thereof, may be substantially lightproof, which may prevent stray light from interfering with optical detection functions and components within the detection assembly 1090.
[0175] The detection assembly 1090 may include fluid connectors 1093 that may couple to tubes, pipes, or other fluid-carrying components. One of the fluid connectors 1093 may act as an inlet for a fluid flow from a column (e.g., column 820 of FIG. 8), and another of the fluid connectors 1093 may act as an output for the fluid flow to downstream modules of the breath analysis system 100. For example, one of the fluid connectors 1093 may receive the flow F10a (FIG. 10A), and the fluid may be expelled from the other fluid connector 1093 as flow F10b (FIG. 10A). The fluid connectors 1093 may be quick-release style connectors that allow for fast and efficient (and non-destructive) coupling and decoupling of tubes to and from the detection assembly 1090.
[0176] The detection assembly 1090 also includes an electrical connector 1094, through which power may be supplied to the components of the detection assembly 1090. Such components may include an emitter and a detector, as described herein. The electrical connector 1094 may also facilitate communication between the detection assembly 1090 and other components of the breath analysis system 100. For example, the electrical connector 1094 may communicatively couple the detection assembly 1090 to an analysis device (e.g., the analysis device 104, 1504, described herein) to facilitate further processing, analysis, storage, and/or display of the results of the detection assembly. The detection assembly 1090 may have one or more processors, memory, and/or other electrical components coupled to an optical detector, and the electrical connector 1094 may be coupled to such components to facilitate communication to other components, processors, computers, analyses devices, etc. In some cases, communications may be provided via optical couplings, via wireless communication (between the detection assembly 1090 and other devices such as an analysis device), or the like.
[0177] FIG. 10D is a cross-sectional view of the detection assembly 1090, taken along line A’-A’ in FIG. 10C. FIG. 10D illustrates example arrangements of internal components of the detection assembly 1090 and shows an example optical scheme for facilitating detection of aldehydes in the flow that passes through the detection assembly 1090. Some internal components and/or structures of the detection assembly 1090 may be omitted from FIG.
10D for clarity.
[0178] As shown in FIG. 10D, the detection assembly 1090 includes a flow channel 1095 (which may be an embodiment of the through portion 1075, FIG. 10A). The flow channel 1095 may be a tube or other enclosed structure that is fluidically coupled to the fluid connectors 1093 and carries fluid 1096 (e.g., fluid output from the column 820) through the detection assembly 1090. The flow channel 1095 may be at least partially transparent or have an at least partially transparent segment to allow electromagnetic radiation (e.g., laser light) to enter the fluid flowing through the flow channel 1095 and to allow light (e.g., from fluorescing dyes or particles) to escape the flow channel 1095 and be detected by a detector (e.g., the detector 1004, described herein). The flow channel 1095 may be formed from or include any suitable material or component, such as glass, polymer, quartz, or the like (or combinations thereof).
[0179] The flow channel 1095 may be positioned in and/or supported by a mounting structure 1005. The mounting structure 1005 may be substantially opaque, and may define a first opening 1006 and a second opening 1007. The first opening 1006 may be positioned to allow a beam of electromagnetic radiation (e.g., a laser beam) to enter into the flow channel 1095 and thus be incident on the fluid 1096 in the flow channel 1095. The second opening 1007 may be positioned to allow light from fluorescing particles to exit the flow channel 1095 and be ultimately sensed or detected. The mounting structure 1005 may be opaque or substantially opaque. Accordingly, the mounting structure 1005 may prevent light from entering or exiting the flow channel 1095 within the detection assembly 1090 except through the first and second openings 1006, 1007. This may help prevent the dye from fluorescing due to extraneous light and/or radiation sources (e.g., by blocking extraneous light and/or radiation), and may prevent light from the fluorescing dye and/or particles from being directed in undesirable or unplanned directions.
[0180] The detection assembly 1090 also includes an emitter 1097, which may be an embodiment of the emitter 1058. The emitter 1097 may be configured to direct a beam of electromagnetic radiation 1099 through the flow channel 1095 and into the fluid 1096 that is flowing through the flow channel 1095. The emitter 1097 may emit any suitable radiation that excites the fluid 1096 or particles within the fluid 1096 and produces a detectible optical response from the fluid 1096, as described herein. More particularly, the radiation from the emitter 1097 may be configured to cause the fluid 1096 or components thereof to fluoresce. In some cases, the emitter 1097 emits a visible laser beam. In other cases, other types of lasers or electromagnetic radiation are used.
[0181] As shown in FIG. 10D, the emitter 1097 directs the beam of electromagnetic radiation 1099 (e.g., a laser beam) at an angle relative to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004. More particularly, as shown, the beam 1099 is substantially perpendicular to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004. This configuration may help prevent or limit the amount of radiation from the emitter 1097 that ultimately falls on the detector 1004, which may help increase the effectiveness of the detector 1004 (e.g., by increasing the signal-to-noise ratio of the light that is incident on the detector 1004). By contrast, placing the emitter 1097 on an opposite side of the flow channel 1095 from the detector 1004 may effectively aim radiation from the emitter 1097 (e.g., a laser beam ) directly at the detector 1004. More particularly, light from the emitter 1097 may pass through the flow channel 1095 and the fluid 1096 and be incident on the detector 1004. Thus, light from a fluorescing dye as well as light from the emitter 1097 may be incident on the detector 1004, which may reduce the effectiveness or accuracy of the detector 1004 (and of the detection assembly 1090 as a whole). While FIG. 10D shows the beam 1099 as perpendicular to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004, other angles and configurations are also possible. For example, the beam 1099 may be directed at a 45 degree angle relative to the light path from the flow channel 1095 to the detector 1004. Other angles and/or orientations that do not result in the beam 1099 being aimed at or being reflected or otherwise directed towards the detector 1004 may also be used.
[0182] The detection assembly 1090 may also include an optical assembly 1098. The optical assembly 1098 includes a first lens 1001 , a filter 1003, and a second lens 1002. The first lens 1001 collimates (e.g., parallelizes) light that is emitted from the flow channel 1095. For example, light that is emitted by fluorescing particles in the fluid 1096 may exit the flow channel 1095 and pass through the second opening 1007 in the mounting structure 1005, and ultimately be incident on the first lens 1001 . The first lens 1001 collimates the light which then passes through the filter 1003. The light may be collimated because the filter 1003, described below, may achieve a target filtering performance only when the angle of incidence of the light is perpendicular to the filter 1003.
[0183] The filter 1003 may be configured to pass only certain frequencies of
electromagnetic radiation, such as those associated with the electromagnetic radiation (e.g., laser light) produced by the emitter 1097, while allowing other frequencies to pass through the filter 1003 with no or less attenuation. In this way, light associated with the fluorescing particles or dye within the fluid 1096 may be substantially isolated from the radiation produced by the emitter, thus producing a higher signal-to-noise ratio for detection of the fluorescence. In some cases, the filter 1003 is a band-pass filter that is configured to pass substantially all of the light within a particular wavelength band (e.g., 520 nm - 540 nm, 510 nm - 530 nm), which may correspond to a wavelength of light emitted by a fluorescing dye in the fluid 1096, while blocking and/or attenuating light that falls outside of the particular wavelength band. Other filters may also be used, such as longpass filters, shortpass filters, band-stop filters, notch filters, dichroic filters, or the like. The particular filter style and/or filter parameters may be selected at least in part based on the frequency of the
electromagnetic radiation emitted by the emitter 1097, the frequency of the light emitted by fluorescing particles or dye, and/or operational parameters of an optical sensor (e.g., the sensor’s particular sensitivity to various different wavelengths of light).
[0184] The second lens 1002 of the optical assembly 1098 may focus the light (or other electromagnetic radiation) that passes through the filter 1003 onto a detector 1004 (which may be an embodiment of or otherwise similar to the detector 1066 described above). The second lens 1002 may focus the light to concentrate the light and/or allow the use of a smaller detector 1004 than would otherwise be necessary if the light were not focused after being collimated by the first lens 1001 .
[0185] The first and second lenses 1001 , 1002 may use any suitable types of lenses and/or lens assemblies. For example, the first and second lenses 1001 , 1002 may be Fresnel lenses, spherical lenses, aspherical lenses, compound lenses, convex lenses, concave lenses, biconvex lenses, biconcave lenses, meniscus lenses, plano-convex lenses, or any other suitable lens. Further, the first and second lenses 1001 , 1002 may be formed of or include any suitable materials, such as plastics (e.g., polycarbonate), glass, sapphire, crystal, or the like.
[0186] As described above with respect to the detector 1066, the detector 1004 may be an optical sensor that measures or detects (optionally in conjunction with processors and/or other electronic components) one or more aspects of the light that is focused thereon by the second lens 1002. For example, the detector 1004 may produce a signal that represents or corresponds to a brightness, color, luminous flux, luminance, or any other suitable optical property of the incident light. A processor or other component associated with the detection assembly 1090 may convert the signal produced by the detector 1004 (which may be an analog electrical signal) to another form (e.g., a digital signal corresponding to a value of an optical property). Other operations, transformations, mappings, or the like may also be performed by a processor to produce a useable detector output. The output of the detector 1004 and any optional processors or circuitry may be sent to another component of the breath analysis system 100 via the electrical connector 1094 and/or via a wireless communications path.
[0187] FIG. 1 1 depicts a sample piping and instrument diagram for an analysis device 1 100. The analysis device 1 100 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 300 described above with respect to FIG. 3. For example, the analysis device 1 100 may include a reagent module 1 1 10, a breath capture module 1 120, a mixing module 1130, an injection module 1 140, and a detection module 1 150. As described above with respect to FIG. 3, the various modules of the analysis device 1 100 represent collections of mechanical components, instruments, and so on that collectively operate to perform the various functions described herein. Rather than define discrete or separated mechanical components or instruments, the modules may be fluidically coupled with one another and operate using various combinations of common, overlapping, and/or interconnecting components and instruments. FIG. 1 1 depicts one embodiment of components and instruments that may be used to fluidically couple and operate the reagent module 1 1 10, the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, the injection module 1 140, and the detection module 1150.
[0188] The reagent module 1 1 10 may be substantially analogous to the reagent module 310 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8. For example, the reagent module 1 1 10 may be configured to include some or all of the chemical compounds, filters, receptacles, and so on used by the analysis device 1 100 for detection of the aldehyde content of a breath sample. In this regard, analogous to the components described in relation to the embodiments of FIGs. 3 - 8, the reagent module 1 1 10 may include a first reagent 1 1 12a, a second reagent 1 1 12b, a third reagent 1 1 12c, a fourth reagent 1 1 12d, a fifth reagent 1 1 12e, a sixth reagent 1 1 12f , a first filter 1 1 14a, a second filter 1 1 14b, and a receptacle 1 1 16, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
[0189] The breath capture module 1 120 may be substantially analogous to the sample capture module 320 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8. For example, the breath capture module 1 120 may be configured to capture aldehydes from a breath sample and elute the captured aldehydes. In this regard, analogous to the components described in relation to the embodiments of FIGs. 3 - 8, the breath capture module 1120 may include a breath capture component 1 121 , a cartridge 1 122, a vacuum pump 1 123, a pan 1 124, a flow instrument 1 125, a fixed volume pump 1 126, a first multi-position valve 1 127a, a second multi-position valve 1 127b, a third multi-position valve 1 127c, a fourth multi-position valve 1 127d, and a directional valve 1 128, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
[0190] The mixing module 1 130 may be substantially analogous to the mixing module 330 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8. For example, the mixing module 1 130 may be configured to form a mobile chromatography phase using the elution formed by the breath capture module 1 120. In this regard, analogous to the components described in relation to the embodiments of FIGs. 3 - 8, the mixing module 1 130 may include a first mixing pump 1 132a, a second mixing pump 1 132b, a third mixing pump 1 132c, a mixing volume 1 134, a first directional valve 1 136a, a second directional valve 1 136b, a flow instrument 1 137, and a multi-position valve 1 138, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
[0191] The injection module 1 140 may be substantially analogous to the injection module 340 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8. For example, the injection module 1 140 may be configured to form a pressurized flow that is used to advance the mobile
chromatography phase through the detection module 1 150. In this regard, analogous to the components described in relation to the embodiments of FIGs. 3 - 8, the injection module 1 140 may include a first injection pump 1 142a, a second injection pump 1142b, a mixing tee 1 144, and a flow instrument 1 146, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
[0192] The detection module 1 150 may be substantially analogous to the detection module 350 described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8. For example, the detection module 1 150 may be configured to detect an aldehyde content of a patient breath sample using an output of the injection module 1 140 and the mixing module 1 130. In this regard, analogous to the components described in relation to the embodiments of FIGs. 3 - 8, the detection module 1 150 may include a control valve 1 152, a sample loop 1 154, a column 1 155, a detection assembly 1 156, a regulator 1 157, a flow instrument 1 158, and a detection pump 1 159, among other components. Redundant explanation of this feature is omitted here for clarity.
[0193] FIGs. 12A - 121 depict various operations of the analysis device 1 100. In particular, FIGs. 12A - 121 represent various fluid flows through one or more of the reagent module 1 1 10, the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, the injection module 1 140, and the detection module 1 150. Each of the fluid flows may correspond to a configuration of the analysis device 1 100 that is one of a multi-step, integrated process that captures aldehydes from a patient breath sample and determines an aldehyde content using an unattended HPLC process. It will be appreciated that the flows described with respect to FIGs. 12A—121 are presented for purposes of illustration only. Other flows and
configurations are contemplated.
[0194] With reference to FIG. 12A, a flow 1290a of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290a may correspond to an operation of capturing aldehydes from a patient breath sample on a permeable membrane. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12A, the flow 1290a may represent a flow of a patient breath sample from the breath capture component 1 121 to the pan 1 124.
[0195] With reference to FIG. 12B, a flow 1290b of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290b may correspond to an operation of forming an elution from the captured aldehydes of the patient breath sample. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12B, the flow 1290b may represent a flow of reagent from the first reagent 1 1 12a through the cartridge 1 122 (eluting the aldehydes) and to the mixing volume 1 134. The flow 1290b may also represent a flow of further reagents (e.g., fourth reagent 1 1 12d, fifth reagent 1 112e, sixth reagent 1 1 12f), including catalysts, calibrants, dyes, and so on, into the mixing volume 1 134.
[0196] With reference to FIG. 12C, a flow 1290c of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290c may correspond to an operation of mixing the chemical compounds contained with the mixing volume 1 134 with air (air agitation), which may help form the mobile chromatography phase. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12C, the flow 1290c may represent a flow of air from the first filter 11 14a to the mixing volume 1 134.
[0197] With reference to FIG. 12D, a flow 1290d of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290d may correspond to an operation of forming a pressurized combination of reagent and buffer. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12D, the flow 1290d may represent a flow of the second reagent 1 112b and the third reagent 1 1 12c into the control valve 1 152 using the first injection pump 1 142a and the second injection pump 1 142b, respectively. [0198] With reference to FIG. 12E, a flow 1290e of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290e may correspond to an operation of loading a mobile chromatography phase into a fixed volume. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12E, the flow 1290e may represent a flow of the mobile chromatography phase into the sample loop 1 154 from the mixing volume 1 134. The flow 1290e may be initiated by the detection pump 1 159 when the control valve 1 152 is in a first configuration (e.g., configuration 900a described with respect to FIG. 9A).
[0199] With reference to FIG. 12F, a flow 1290f of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290f may correspond to an operation of pushing the mobile chromatography phase through a column or other separation structure of the detection module 1 150.
Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12F, the flow 1290f may represent a flow of the pressurized combination output from the injection module 1 140 into the sample loop 1154, through the column 1 155, detection assembly 1 156, and to the receptacle 1 1 16 of the reagent module 1 1 10. The flow 1290f may be initiated when the control valve 1 152 is in a second configuration (e.g., configuration 900b described with respect to FIG. 9B).
[0200] With reference to FIG. 12G, a flow 1290g of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290g may correspond to an operation of priming or repressurizing an output of the injection module 1 140. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12G, the flow 1290g may represent a flow of an output of the injection module 1140 through the control valve 1152 and to the receptacle 1 1 16. The flow 1290g may be initiated when the control valve 1152 is in a third configuration (e.g., configuration 900b described with respect to FIG. 9C).
[0201] With reference to FIG. 12H, a flow 1290h of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290h may correspond to an operation of sanitizing or otherwise flushing one or more components of the analysis device 1 100 with a reagent. For example, this may be subsequent to an analysis of aldehydes in a first breath sample, in order to prepare the analysis for an analysis of aldehydes in a second or subsequent breath sample.
Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 12H, the flow 1290h may represent a flow of the second reagent 1 1 12b through the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, and to the receptacle 1 1 16 of the reagent module 1 1 10.
[0202] With reference to FIG. 121, a flow 1290i of the analysis device 1 100 is depicted. The flow 1290i may correspond to an operation of purging or otherwise passing air through one or more components of the analysis device 1100. For example, this may be used in order to prepare the analysis device 1 100 for an analysis of aldehydes in a second or subsequent breath sample. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 121, the flow 1290i may represent a flow of air through the first filter 1 1 14a and through the breath capture module 1 120, the mixing module 1 130, and to the receptacle 1 1 16 of the reagent module 1 110. [0203] FIGs. 13A and 13B depict a sample piping and instrument diagram from an analysis device 1300. The analysis device 1300 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 1 100 described above with respect to FIGs. 11 - 121. For example, the analysis device 1300 may be configured to capture aldehydes from a breath sample and determine a relative aldehyde content using an unattended HPLC process, as described herein. Accordingly, the analysis device 1300 may include a reagent module, a breath capture module, a mixing module, an injection module, and a detection module, which collectively operate to perform the various functions of the HPLC process described herein.
[0204] In this regard, substantially analogous to the analysis device 1 100 described with respect to FIGs. 1 1 - 121, the analysis device 1300 shown in FIGs. 13A and 13B may include a reagent module having: a first reagent 1312a; a second reagent 1312b; a third reagent 1312c; a fourth reagent 1312d; a fifth reagent 1312e; a sixth reagent 1312f ; a first filter 1314a; a second filter 1314b; and a receptacle 1316, among other components.
Further, the analysis device 1300 shown in FIGs. 13A and 13B may include a breath capture module having: a breath capture component 1321 ; a cartridge 1322, a vacuum pump 1323; a pan 1324; a flow instrument 1325; a fixed volume pump 1326; a first multi-position valve 1327a; a second multi-position valve 1327b; a third multi-position valve 1327c; a fourth multiposition valve 1327d; and a directional valve 1328, among other components. Further, the analysis device 1300 may include a mixing module having: a first mixing pump 1332a; a second mixing pump 1332b; a third mixing pump 1332c; a mixing volume 1334; a first directional valve 1336a; a second directional valve 1336b; a flow instrument 1337; and a multi-position valve 1338, among other components.
Further, the analysis device 1300 may include an injection module having: a first injection pump 1342a; a second injection pump 1342b; a mixing tee 1344; and a flow instrument 1346, among other components. Further, the analysis device 1300 may include a detection module having: a control valve 1352; a sample loop 1354; a column 1355; a detection assembly 1356; a regulator 1357; a flow instrument 1358; and a detection pump 1359, among other components. Redundant explanation of each of the foregoing components, assemblies, structures, instruments, and so forth is omitted here for clarity.
[0205] With reference to FIG 13A, the analysis device 1300 may be configured to remove dissolved gases within reagents that are used by the high-pressure pumps of the injection module. For example, the first injection pump 1342a may be configured to output a pressurized flow of the second reagent 1312b and the second injection pump 1342b may be configured to output a pressurized flow of the third reagent 1312c. Dissolved gasses within one or both of the second reagent 1312b or the third reagent 1312c may decrease pump performance over time. In some case, high dissolved gas content within the second reagent 1312b or the third reagent 1312c (or any of the reagents and chemical compounds described herein) may cause the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pump 1324b to deprime or cavitate, thereby resulting in decreased or nominal pressure at an output of the pumps.
[0206] To mitigate the foregoing, the analysis device 1300 may employ one or more degassers, for example, at an input to various pumps within the device. In the example embodiment of FIG. 13A, the analysis device 1300 include a first degasser 1343a and the second degasser 1343b. The first degasser 1343a may be coupled with an input of the first injection pump 1342a and the second degasser 1343b may be coupled with an input of the second injection pump 1342b. The first degasser 1343a and the second degasser 1343b may be vacuum-type degassers, which utilize vacuum pressure to draw dissolved gasses from a given fluid stream; however, in other embodiments, other degassing systems may be employed.
[0207] As shown in FIG. 13A, to facilitate the foregoing vacuum-type degassing, the vacuum pump 1323 may be fluidically coupled with the first degasser 1343a and the second degasser 1343b. The vacuum pump 1323 may be configured to draw air through one or both of the first degasser 1343a or the second degasser 1343b. This may form a vacuum or otherwise form a reduced pressure environment within an internal chamber of the respective degasser. Dissolved gasses within a fluidic input to the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pump 1342b may migrate toward the reduced pressure environment, and thus be removed or substantially removed from the pump input. This may reduce the dissolved gas content of the inputs (e.g., second reagent 1312b, third reagent 1312c, and so on) to the first injection pump 1342a and/or the second injection pump 1342b, and thereby enhance pump performance over time.
[0208] In some cases, it may be desirable to clean, flush, or otherwise cycle fluid through some or all of the internal components of the high pressure pumps of the injection module. This may allow chemical buildup, debris, and so on to be removed from the pumps, which may enhance longevity and performance. As described herein, the analysis device 1300 may output various chemical waste streams, which may eventually flow toward the receptacle 1316. The various waste outputs of the analysis deice 1300 may, however, in some cases be used to clean, flush, or otherwise cycle fluid through the high-pressure pumps.
[0209] To facilitate the foregoing. FIG. 13A shows the analysis device 1300 having a recirculation reservoir 1347. The recirculation reservoir 1347 may receive a waste output from the detection module, as described herein. The waste output may include various combinations of methanol, waste, and/or other chemicals that may be used to help clean the high-pressure pumps of the injection module. As such, the recirculation reservoir 1347 may be used to collect some or all of the waste output and direct the output to the high-pressure pumps. For example, the recirculation reservoir 1347 may be fluidically coupled with one or both of the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pump 1342b. This
configuration may allow the waste stream to be circulated relative to the piston (or other internal component) of the first injection pump 1342a or the second injection pumps 1342b. The waste stream, as shown in FIG. 13A, may travel back toward the recirculation reservoir 1347 and ultimately to the receptacle 1316 of the reagent module, where it may be disposed. This may enhance the longevity of the pumps using waste chemicals present as a result of the HPLC process of the analysis device 1300.
[0210] It will be appreciated that the various components, assemblies, instruments, and so forth of the analysis device 1300 may be implemented in a variety of physical
configurations. In some cases, it may be advantageous to implement multiple components in a single physical manifold. This may help the modules perform the respective functionality described herein when confined to a relatively small scale, such as the internal volume of the analysis device enclosure 108, shown with respect to FIG. 1 .
[0211] Accordingly, with reference to FIG. 13B, representations of various physical manifolds are shown (in phantom line) that may group or physically attach certain ones of the components, assemblies, and instruments of the analysis device 1300 to one another.
For example, the manifold may be a physical connection point or juncture within the analysis device 1300 that is configured to connect each of the associated components. In other cases, the manifold may be an assembly of structures that connect certain one of the components of the analysis device 1300 to one another. It will be appreciated that FIG. 13B shows an example implementation of manifolds within the analysis device 1300. Other implementations are possible and within the scope of the present disclosure, including implementing and connecting each of the various components, assemblies, instruments of the analysis device 1300 with a single manifold.
[0212] By way of particular example FIG. 13B depicts a reagent container manifold 1390. The reagent container manifold 1390 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with one or more of the a first reagent 1312a; a second reagent 1312b; a third reagent 1312c; a fourth reagent 1312d; a fifth reagent 1312e; a sixth reagent 1312f ; a first filter 1314a; a second filter 1314b; and a receptacle 1316. [0213] FIG. 13B further shows a first process manifold 1392. The first process manifold 1392 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the second multi-position valve 1327b and the third multi-position valve 1327c of the breath capture module. [0214] FIG. 13B further shows a second process manifold 1394. The second process manifold 1394 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the fixed volume pump 1326 of the breath capture module.
[0215] FIG. 13B further shows a third process manifold 1396. The third process manifold 1396 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the first multi-position valve 1327a and the fourth multi-position valve 1327d of the breath capture module
[0216] FIG. 13B further shows a fourth process manifold 1398. The fourth process manifold 1392 may define an interface or otherwise be configured to fluidically couple other components and/or manifolds of the analysis device 1300 with the first mixing pump 1332a, the second mixing pump 1332b, the third mixing pump 1332c, the mixing volume 1334, the first directional valve 1336a, the second directional valve 1336b, the multi-position valve 1338, the detection pump 1359, and the recirculation reservoir 1347 of the mixing and/or detection modules. [0217] FIG. 13B further shows various interface manifolds. The interface manifold may be used to fluidically couple one or more of the process manifolds to one another. This may allow the analysis device 1300 to be implemented in a relatively confined space and/or otherwise reduce amount of fluidic connection points within the system. By way of particular example, FIG. 13B shown a first interface manifold 1393a and the second interface manifold 1393b. The first interface manifold 1393a may be used to fluidically couple various flows of the first process manifold 1392 with various flows of the second process manifold 1394. The second interface manifold 1393b may be used to fluidically couple various flows of the first process manifold 1392 with the fourth process manifold 1398.
[0218] To facilitate the reader’s understanding of the various functionalities of the embodiments discussed herein, reference is now made to the flow diagram in FIG. 14, which illustrates process 1400. While specific steps (and orders of steps) of the methods presented herein have been illustrated and will be discussed, other methods (including more, fewer, or different steps than those illustrated) consistent with the teachings presented herein are also envisioned and encompassed with the present disclosure. [0219] In this regard, with reference to FIG. 14, process 1400 relates generally to determining an aldehyde content of multiple breath samples. The process 1400 may be used with any of the breath analysis systems and breath analysis devices described herein, for example, such as breath analysis system 100, analysis device 104 and 300 and variations and embodiments thereof.
[0220] At operation 1404, a first breath sample of multiple breath samples may be drawn through a permeable membrane of an analysis device. For example and with reference to FIG. 4, a breath sample contained within the breath capture component 404 may be drawn through the permeable membrane 412 of the analysis device 300. A pump 424, in one embodiment, may be a vacuum pump that is used to evacuate the breath sample from the breath capture component 404 and through the permeable membrane 412. The permeable membrane 412 may be a silica bed or other structure that may capture aldehydes from the breath sample as it is drawn through.
[0221] At operation 1408, a breath sample may be eluted from the permeable membrane using a first reagent from a container positioned within the analysis device. For example and with reference to FIG. 4, the second sample capture reagent 436 may be propagated through the permeable membrane 412. The second sample capture reagent 436 may elute aldehydes captured by the permeable membrane 412 as it flows through the cartridge. The elution may be advanced toward a mixing module (e.g., mixing module 330 of FIG. 5) in order to form a mobile chromatography phase that contains the aldehydes from the patient breath sample.
[0222] At operation 1412, an eluted breath sample may be advanced through a column using a second reagent from a container within the analysis device. For example and with reference to FIG. 8, the eluted breath sample may be part of a mobile chromatography phase that is advanced through the column 820 by the pressurized combination output from the injection module 340. For example, the mobile chromatography phase (formed at least partially from the eluted breath sample) may be loaded into the sample loop 808 and advanced through the column 820 by the flow F7, which may be an output of the injection module 340.
[0223] At operation 1416, fluoresced particles may be detected at an output of the column corresponding to an aldehyde content of the breath sample. For example and with reference to FIG. 8, the output of the column 820 may be analyzed by a detection assembly 828. The detection assembly 828 may detect fluoresced light emitted by fluorescent dye when the dye receives energy from an emitter or other energy source (e.g., as described in great detail above with respect to FIGs. 10A and 10B). [0224] At operation 1420, the operations 1404 - 1416 may be repeated for a second breath sample. For example and with reference to FIGs. 3 - 8, the analysis device 300 may be configured for multiple, successive analyses of patient breath samples. For example, the analysis device 300 may be used in a clinical setting in which multiple samples are collected from patients and analyzed using the analysis device 300 by substantially untrained personnel. To facilitate the foregoing, the analysis device 300 may be configured to reset or return to an initial configuration in order to analyze subsequent breath samples. In one embodiment, this may involve flushing an internal network of tubes with further reagents from the container of the analysis device 300, for example, which may help sanitize or sterilize the analysis device 300 so that the aldehydes of the previous sample do not influence the detection of aldehydes in a subsequent breath sample. Further, the internal network tubes may also be purged with air filtered through the container, such as through the filter 440. This may help dry various components of the analysis device 300, prior to receiving reagents for the analysis of aldehydes in a subsequent breath sample.
[0225] As described herein, the analysis device 300 may use various chemical compounds or reagents to determine an aldehyde content of a breath sample. The reagents may be contained within a container of the analysis device 300. For example, as described in greater detail below, the analysis device 300 may include a container having internal chambers that may hold the reagents used by the analysis device 300 for the determination of an aldehyde content of the breath sample. In the sample process 1400, the container may include a quantity of at least a first reagent and a second reagent for the first breath sample and the second breath sample. Accordingly, the analysis device 300 may operate to determine an aldehyde content of multiple patient breath samples using the same container. This may facilitate use of the analysis device for multiple, successive analyses, for example, by reducing an interval for maintaining or restocking the analysis device 300 with additional chemical compounds. For example, the container may include sufficient reagents so that the analysis device 300 may analyze breath samples of each patient of a clinician on a given day or week, as one possibility.
[0226] FIGs. 15 - 18 depict an analysis device 1504. The analysis device 1504 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 104 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 2E. For example, the analysis device 1504 may be configured to determine an aldehyde content of a breath sample. Similar to the analysis device 104, the analysis device 1504 may include an unattended HPLC process and one or more systems that capture and elute aldehydes of a breath sample and detect aldehydes according to molecule size once separated by the HPLC. In this regard, analogous to the components described in relation to the embodiments of FIGs. 1 - 2E, the analysis device 1504 may include an enclosure 1508 and a display 1512, among other components. Generally, the enclosure 1508 may form an external surface of the analysis device 1504 that conceals various components, modules, and systems of the analysis device 1504. The display 1512 may be a touch sensitive display configured to depict an output of the analysis device 1504 corresponding to a detected aldehyde content. Redundant explanation of these features is omitted here for clarity.
[0227] With reference to FIG. 15, the analysis device 1504 is shown having a container 1524 at least partially received within an opening 1520 of the enclosure 1508. The container 1524 may be a reagent container that is configured to hold reagents, chemical compounds, or other substances or solutions within internal chambers defined within an internal volume of the container 1524 (e.g., as described below with respect to FIG. 17). When in the assembled configuration shown in FIG. 15, the chemical compounds held within the container 1524 may be substantially concealed by the enclosure 1508 or otherwise positioned within the analysis device 1504.
[0228] With reference to FIG. 15, the analysis device 1504 is shown having the container 1524 removed from the opening 1520. As described herein, the container 1524 may be a removable component of the analysis device 1504. This may allow the container 1524 to include a quantity of reagents used for multiple breath analyses. When one or more of the reagents held within the container has a volume insufficient for subsequent breath analyses, the container 1524 may be replaced with a new container having a replenished quantity of reagents.
[0229] The container 1524 may be coupled to the analysis device 1504 using a variety of different structures and assemblies. For example, one or more fasteners, clips, guides, protrusions, and/or other attachment structures, and so on may be used to removeably couple the container to the analysis device 1504. In one embodiment, such attachment structures may be configured to secure the container 1524 within the opening 1520 upon rotating the container 1524 by a predetermined amount, such as a 45, 60, or 90 degree turn, when the container 1524 is at least partially received within the opening 1520. To disengage the container 1524 from the analysis device 1504, a user may rotate the container by a predetermined amount, such as a 45, 60, or 90 degree turn, in an opposing direction from the input used to attach the container 1524 within the analysis device 1504.
[0230] The analysis device 1504 may be configured to selectively dispense reagents or other chemical compounds from the container 1524 in order to perform one or more of the functions described herein. To facilitate the foregoing, the container 1524 may include a group of passages 1528. The group of passages 1528 may be configured to fluidically couple with a corresponding group of receiving features 1532 of the analysis device 1504. Each of the passages 1528, as described below with respect to FIG. 17, may be fluidically coupled with an internal chamber configured to hold a distinct reagent. Accordingly, when the container 1524 is advanced at least partially into the opening 1520 or fully seated therein, the group of receiving features 1532 may dispense particular reagents from the container 1524 using a corresponding one of the group of passages 1528. As described above, for example with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8, the analysis device 300 may selectively dispense reagents (e.g., using fixed volume pumps), and thus it will be appreciated that the group of receiving features 1532 shown in FIG. 15 may be fluidically coupled with appropriate components, instruments, devices, and so on, to facilitate such functionality.
[0231] With reference to FIG. 17, a simplified cross-sectional view of the analysis device 1504 and the container 1524 is shown. In particular, FIG. 17 illustrates the container 1524 having a group of internal chambers 1529. The group of internal chambers 1529 may be cavities or internal volumes of the container 1524 that are separated from one another. In this regard, each chamber of the group of internal chambers 1529 may be configured to hold a distinct chemical compound. A respective passage of the group of passages 1528 may be fluidically coupled to corresponding ones of the group of internal chambers 1529.
Accordingly, when in an assembled configuration, a chemical compound held within an internal chamber of the container 1524 may be dispensed by the analysis device 1504 through the corresponding one of the group of passages 1528 and into an associated receiving feature.
[0232] It will be appreciated that the simplified cross-section of the container 1524 depicted in FIG. 17 is presented for purposes of illustration only. Internal chambers of the group of internal chambers 1529 may each have a distinct size, shape, and configuration, for example, based on a type of reagent held therein, amount of reagent used in the analysis relative to other reagents, and so on. In this regard, each of the internal chambers of the group of internal chambers 1529 may be configured for use with a certain chemical compound, and therefore may include or be coupled with a coating, material, and so on tailored for the chemical compound (e.g., to resist leaking, corrosion, and/or degradation). Further, as described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8, the container 1524 (e.g., reagent module 310 of FIG. 3) may include other structures and devices, including filters, receptacles, and so on, not shown in FIG. 16 for the interest of clarity.
[0233] FIG. 18 depicts a cross-sectional view of the analysis device 1504 of FIG. 15, taken along line A-A of FIG 15. As shown in FIG. 18, the enclosure 1508 may define an internal volume 1509 of the analysis device. While not shown in FIG. 18 for the interest of clarity, some or all of the components of, with reference to FIG. 3, the reagent module 310, the sample capture module 320, the mixing module 330, the injection module 340, and/or the detection module 350 may be positioned or concealed by the enclosure 1508. [0234] The analysis device 1504 may include a false bottom 1510 positioned within the internal volume 1509 and coupled to the enclosure 1508. The false bottom 1510 may be used to channel stray fluids within the internal volume 1509 toward a collection volume 151 1 . Stray fluids may be caused, for example, in the event of leak or other failure of the various components of the reagent module 310, the sample capture module 320, the mixing module 330, the injection module 340, and/or the detection module 350, described herein. The internal volume 1509 may be substantially sealed from an external environment, and thus stray fluids may migrate toward the false bottom 1510 and into the collection volume 151 1 .
[0235] Stray fluids may thus pool or build up in the collection volume 151 1 . The collection volume 151 1 may be substantially sealed from the external environment, which may help prevent or mitigate leaks from the analysis device 1504. Fluids held within the collection volume 151 1 may be evacuated, for example, in order to perform maintenance on the analysis device 1504, transport the analysis device 1504, and so on. To facilitate the foregoing, the enclosure 1508 may define an outlet 1515. The outlet 1515 may fluidically couple the collection volume 151 1 with the external environment. A plug 1514, or other feature configured to temporarily seal the collection volume 151 1 may be positioned within the outlet 1515. Accordingly, a user may remove the plug 1514 from the outlet 1515 in order to empty fluids from the collections volume 151 1 .
[0236] FIG. 19 presents an illustrative analysis device 1900. The schematic
representation in FIG. 19 may be substantially analogous to the analysis device 104 and 300 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 and 3. However, FIG. 19 may also more generally represent other types of devices and configurations that may be used to receive a user input signal from an input device in accordance with the embodiments described herein. In this regard, the analysis device 1900 may include any appropriate hardware (e.g., computing devices, data centers, switches), software (e.g., applications, system programs, engines), network components (e.g., communication paths, interfaces, routers) and the like (not necessarily shown in the interest of clarity) for use in facilitating any appropriate operations disclosed herein.
[0237] As shown in FIG. 19, the analysis device 1900 may include a processing unit or element 1908a operatively connected to computer memory 1912 and computer-readable media 1916. The processing unit 1908a may be operatively connected to the memory 1912 and computer-readable media 1916 components via an electronic bus or bridge (e.g., such as system bus 1910). The processing unit 1908a may include one or more computer processors or microcontrollers that are configured to perform operations in response to computer-readable instructions. The processing element 1908a may be a central processing unit of the analysis device 1900. Additionally or alternatively, the processing unit 1908a may be other processors within the device including application specific integrated chips (ASIC) and other microcontroller devices.
[0238] The memory 1912 may include a variety of types of non-transitory computer- readable storage media, including, for example, read access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable memory ( e.g ., EPROM and EEPROM), or flash memory. The memory 1912 is configured to store computer-readable instructions, sensor values, and other persistent software elements. Computer-readable media 1916 may also include a variety of types of non-transitory computer-readable storage media including, for example, a hard-drive storage device, a solid state storage device, a portable magnetic storage device, or other similar device. The computer-readable media 1916 may also be configured to store computer-readable instructions, sensor values, and other persistent software elements.
[0239] In this example, the processing unit 1908a is operable to read computer-readable instructions stored on the memory 1912 and/or computer-readable media 1916. The computer-readable instructions may adapt the processing unit 1908a to perform the operations or functions described above with respect to FIGs. 2 - 16. The computer- readable instructions may be provided as a computer-program product, software application, or the like.
[0240] As shown in FIG. 19, the analysis device 1900 may also include a display 1918. The display 1918 may include a liquid-crystal display (LCD), organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, light emitting diode (LED) display, or the like. If the display 1918 is an LCD, the display may also include a backlight component that can be controlled to provide variable levels of display brightness. If the display 1918 is an OLED or LED type display, the brightness of the display 1918 may be controlled by modifying the electrical signals that are provided to display elements.
[0241 ] The analysis device 1900 may also include a battery 1924 that is configured to provide electrical power to the components of the analysis device 1900. The battery 1924 may include one or more power storage cells that are linked together to provide an internal supply of electrical power. In this regard, the battery 1924 may be a component of a power source 1928 (e.g., including a charging system or other circuitry that supplies electrical power to components of the analysis device 1900). The battery 1924 may be operatively coupled to power management circuitry that is configured to provide appropriate voltage and power levels for individual components or groups of components within the analysis device 1900. The battery 1924, via power management circuitry, may be configured to receive power from an external source, such as an AC power outlet or interconnected computing device. The battery 1924 may store received power so that the analysis device 1900 may operate without connection to an external power source for an extended period of time, which may range from several hours to several days.
[0242] The analysis device 1900 may also include one or more sensors 1940 that may be used to detect a touch and/or force input, environmental condition, orientation, position, or some other aspect of the analysis device 1900. In this regard, the sensors 1940 may be used to detect an input at a touch-sensitive display (e.g., display 1918) of the analysis device 1900 and/or other surface or feature, such as an external surface of the analysis device 1900 defined by an outer enclosure or shell. Example sensors 1940 that may be included in the analysis device 1900 may include, without limitation, one or more accelerometers, gyrometers, inclinometers, goniometers, or magnetometers. The sensors 1940 may also include one or more proximity sensors, such as a magnetic hall-effect sensor, inductive sensor, capacitive sensor, continuity sensor, or the like. Resistive and contact-based sensors may also be used.
[0243] The sensors 1940 may also be broadly defined to include wireless positioning devices including, without limitation, global positioning system (GPS) circuitry, Wi-Fi circuitry, cellular communication circuitry, and the like. As such, the sensors 1940 may be used to identify an environment of the analysis device 1900 (e.g., a clinical setting, a service facility, and so on). The analysis device 1900 may, in some embodiments, execute a different mode or configuration based on the identified environment, such as executing different analysis cycles, testing or calibrating produces, and so on. The analysis device 1900 may also include one or more optical sensors including, without limitation, photodetectors, photosensors, image sensors, infrared sensors, or the like. In one example, the sensor 1940 may be an image sensor that detects a degree to which an ambient image matches a stored image. As such, the sensors 1940 may be used to identify a user of the analysis device 1900. In this regard, the sensors 1940 may be used to control access to the analysis device 1900, for example, such as by initiating one or more operations when the sensors 1940 identify a known or authenticated user. The sensors 1940 may also include one or more acoustic elements, such as a microphone used alone or in combination with a speaker element. This may allow the analysis device 1900 to be operable by voice control, among other possibilities. The sensors 1940 may also include a temperature sensor, barometer, pressure sensor, altimeter, moisture sensor or other similar environmental sensor. The sensors 1940 may also include a light sensor that detects an ambient light condition of the analysis device 1900. [0244] The sensors 1940, either alone or in combination, may generally be a motion sensor that is configured to determine an orientation, position, and/or movement of the analysis device 1900. For example, the sensors 1940 may include one or more motion sensors including, for example, one or more accelerometers, gyrometers, magnetometers, optical sensors, or the like to detect motion. The sensors 1940 may also be configured to determine one or more environmental conditions, such as temperature, air pressure, humidity, and so on. The sensors 1940, either alone or in combination with other input, may be configured to estimate a property of a supporting surface including, without limitation, a material property, surface property, friction property, or the like.
[0245] The analysis device 1900 may also include a camera 1932 that is configured to capture a digital image or other optical data. The camera 1932 may include a charge- coupled device, complementary metal oxide (CMOS) device, or other device configured to convert light into electrical signals. The camera 1932 may also include one or more light sources, such as a strobe, flash, or other light-emitting device. As discussed above, the camera 1932 may be generally categorized as a sensor for detecting optical conditions and/or objects in the proximity of the analysis device 1900. However, the camera 1932 may also be used to create photorealistic images that may be stored in an electronic format, such as JPG, GIF, TIFF, PNG, raw image file, or other similar file types. In a sample
embodiment, the camera 1932 may be used to capture an image of an authenticated user of the analysis device 1900. The photorealistic image captured by the camera 1932 may be stored (e.g., at memory 1912 and/or an external source). The sensors 1940, as described above, may be used to compare an ambient image (e.g., a user requesting access) with the stored imaged. Where the images sufficiently match, the analysis device 1900 may allow the requesting user to initiate one or more operations (e.g., testing a breath sample). This may be helpful in clinical settings, for example, in which may be desirable to limit physical contact with the analysis device 1900.
[0246] The analysis device 1900 may also include a communication port 1944 that is configured to transmit and/or receive signals or electrical communication from an external or separate device. The communication port 1944 may be configured to couple to an external device via a cable, adaptor, or other type of electrical connector. In some embodiments, the communication port 1944 may be used to couple the analysis device 1900 with a computing device and/or other appropriate accessories configured to send and/or receive electrical signals. The communication port 1944 may be configured to receive identifying information from an external accessory, which may be used to determine a mounting or support configuration. For example, the communication port 1944 may be used to determine that the analysis device 1900 is coupled to a mounting accessory, such as a particular type of stand or support structure.
[0247] FIGs. 20 - 26 depict a breath analysis system 2000. The breath analysis system 2000 may be substantially analogous to the breath analysis system 100 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 19. For example, the breath analysis system 2000 may include one or more assemblies that capture and elute aldehydes from a breath sample of a user and an analysis device that detects concentrations of various aldehydes using an optionally attended HPLC process. The breath analysis system 2000 may also include one or more assemblies configured to store and/or receive reagents or other chemicals, fluids, and so forth that facilitate the HPLC process. In this regard, FIGs. 20 - 26 describe an
implementation of a reagent container that is used to store and/or receive reagents or other chemicals, fluids, and so forth that facilitate the HPLC process. The reagent container described with respect to FIGs. 20 - 26 may be an example implementation of one or more components, instruments, subassemblies, or the like that cooperate to perform at least some of the functions described with respect to the reagent module 310 described above with respect to FIGs. 1 - 19. It will be appreciated, however, that other implementations are possible and are within the scope of the present disclosure, as described herein.
[0248] FIG. 20 depicts an example embodiment of the breath analysis system 2000. The breath analysis system 2000 may generally include an analysis device 2004, a sample capture assembly 2020, and a reagent container 2030 (shown in phantom and positioned within the analysis device 2004). The sample capture assembly 2020 may be configured to capture aldehydes from a breath sample. The reagent container 2030 may be configured to hold some or all of the chemical compounds used by the analysis device 2004 for aldehyde detection of the captured breath sample. The reagent container 2030 may also include one or more internal chambers configured to receive waste, filter air, and so forth. Explained in greater detail below, the reagent container 2030 may be a removable component coupled with the analysis device 2004. As shown in FIG. 20, the reagent container 2030 is positioned substantially within the analysis device 2004, and is therefore indicated in FIG.
20 by phantom line. The analysis device 2004 may be configured to, in conjunction with the sample capture assembly 2020 and the reagent container 2030, form an elution containing the captured aldehydes and perform a variety of processes that are used to determine a relative aldehyde content of the breath sample.
[0249] The analysis device 2004 may be substantially analogous to the various analysis devices described herein, such as the analysis device 104 and the analysis device 300, and include similar components and functional features. For example, as shown in FIG. 20, the analysis device 2004 may include an enclosure 2006, a display 2008, a graphical output 2010, and a lid 2012. It will be appreciated that the analysis device 2004 may also include various modules, such as collections of mechanical components, instruments, and so forth that collectively operate to perform the functions described herein, including at least a reagent module, sample capture module, a mixing module, an injection module, and a detection module, such as those described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 121. Redundant explanation of these components and modules is omitted here for clarity.
[0250] The breath analysis system 2000 is shown in a configuration in which the sample capture assembly 2020 is coupled to the analysis device 2004. The sample capture assembly 2020 may be inserted into the analysis device 2004 subsequent to capturing a breath sample from a user. The analysis device 2004 may sequentially initiate one or more fluid flows that draw the captured breath sample through a permeable membrane within the sample capture assembly 2020 and form an elution of aldehydes trapped within the membrane. In some cases, the fluid flow from the analysis device 2004 may include reagents held by the reagent container 2030.
[0251] FIGs. 21 A and 21 B depict a breath analysis system 2000, such as the breath analysis system generally discussed above and described in greater detail below. In particular, FIGs. 21 A and 21 B depict the reagent container 2030 separated from the analysis device 2004, according to various configurations. While the reagent container 2030 is shown in FIGs. 21 A and 21 B as being a single, removable assembly, other configurations are possible. For example, the reagent container 2030 may be implemented as a collection of sub-assemblies, each separately detachable from the analysis device 2004. The reagent container 2030 may also be fully or partially integrated into the analysis device 2004.
Further, other mechanisms than those shown in FIGs. 21 A and 21 B may be used to hold and dispense reagents, such as various different types of internal chambers, vents, valves, and so forth. As such, the examples of the reagent container 2030 are shown herein for purposes of illustration only.
[0252] FIG. 21 A depicts an exploded view of the breath analysis system 2000. In the exploded view shown in FIG. 21 A, the reagent container 2030 and the lid 2012 are separated from the analysis device 2004.
[0253] The analysis device 2004 may include a receiving feature 2014. The receiving feature 2014 may be an opening positioned in a side of the analysis device 2004. The receiving feature 2014 may be configured to receive the reagent container 2030 and couple the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004. For example, the receiving feature 2014 may have a shape that substantially matches, conforms, or aligns with a shape of the reagent container 2030. In the configuration of FIG. 21 A, the receiving feature 2014 may be a hole defined by a substantially circular perimeter with a flat bottom; however, this is not required. More broadly, the receiving feature 2014 may have a contour that matches a contour of the reagent container 2030 to facilitate engagement of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004. In other cases, however other shapes may be used for one or both of the receiving feature 2014 or the reagent container 2030. The analysis device 2004 may also include various alignment features, conduits, vents, and so forth that guide the reagent container 2030 into an appropriate position within the receiving feature 2014 and/or operate to fluidically couple one or more internal chambers of the reagent container with the analysis device 2004.
[0254] As described in greater detail below, the reagent container 2030 may generally be a collection of internal chambers that are configured to hold various chemical compounds. The internal chambers may also be configured to hold an air filter, receive process waste, and so forth in order to facilitate the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004. In this regard, in one embodiment, the reagent container 2030 may be an integrated component that also includes each and every chemical compound required to perform the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004, including having a sufficient volume of chemical compounds to perform multiple iterations of the HPLC process. For example, as described above with respect to FIGs. 3 - 8, possible chemical compounds include methanol (MeOH of a variety of concentrations, e.g., any concentration, such as between 10% and 100%, or multiple concentrations), buffers, dyes, calibrants, catalysts, and/or other items that may facilitate manipulation of aldehydes during the HPLC process. It will be appreciated, however, that the reagent container 2030 may include a subset of the chemical compounds used to facilitate the HPLC process.
[0255] The analysis device 2004 may also use filtered air and emit a volume of waste chemicals for each iteration of the HPLC process, among other HPLC inputs and outputs. The reagent container 2030 may, in some embodiments, include structures, assemblies, devices, and so forth that operate to provide filtered air and a waste receptacle for the analysis device, among other possibilities. For example, one or more chambers of the reagent container 2030 may include an air filter. The analysis device 2004 may be configured to draw ambient air through the air filter of the reagent container 2030 and thereby provide filtered air to one or more systems for use in one or more processes of the analysis device 2004.
[0256] The reagent container 2030 may also include a waste volume. The analysis device 2004 may be configured to dispense waste from one or more processes into the waste volume of the reagent container 2030. In this manner, the reagent container 2030 may be an integrated component that provides both the inputs to the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004 (e.g., reagents, filtered air flow) and that receives the outputs of the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004.
[0257] To facilitate the foregoing, the reagent container 2030 may include a group of internal chambers (not shown in FIG. 21 A) separating the various reagents, filters, waste volumes, and so forth from one another. Each of the internal chambers may be fluidically coupled with one or more conduits that define one or more a flow paths between the internal chamber and the analysis device 2004, as described in greater detail below. The internal chambers may be held within an enclosed volume of the reagent container 2030. For example, FIG. 21 A shows the reagent container 2030 having an enclosure 2032 that includes, and forms an exterior barrier around, a group of internal chambers. The enclosure 2032 may have one or more exterior surfaces that matches a contour of the receiving feature 2014 of the analysis device 2004. This may facilitate attachment and removal of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004 at the receiving feature 2014.
[0258] The reagent container 2030 may also have a handle 2033. The handle 2033 may be configured to be grasped by a user and/or otherwise used to manipulate a position of the reagent container 2030 relative to the analysis device 2004. For example, the handle 2033 may allow a user to position the reagent container 2030 into the receiving feature 2014. The reagent container 2030 is replaceable or consumable and, as such, the handle 2033 may also allow a user to remove the reagent container 2030 from the receiving feature 2014 when the chemical compound held within the reagent container 2030 is consumed, the waste volume of the reagent container filled, and so forth.
[0259] The analysis device 2004 may include a group of conduits, pins, tubes, and/or other fluidic connections that are each configured to fluidically couple with a corresponding one of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030. To facilitate the foregoing, the reagent container 2030 may be positioned within the receiving feature 2014 and aligned with the various fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004. Such alignment may be facilitated by the corresponding or matching shapes of the receiving feature 2014 and the reagent container 2030. Alignment features, described in greater detail below, positioned along one or more walls of the analysis device 2004 may also help guide the reagent container 2030 into an appropriate position. Once aligned, the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004 may be pressed against the reagent container 2030 to complete a fluidic coupling of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
[0260] The lid 2012 of the analysis device 2004 may be used to both conceal the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004 and advance the reagent container 2030 toward the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004. For example, the reagent container 2030 may be slid into the receiving feature 2014 and the lid 2012 may be screwed or fastened to the analysis device enclosure 2006 about the receiving feature 2014, thereby covering the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004. The lid 2012 may also include a catch 2013 on an underside (shown in phantom in FIG. 21 A). The catch 2013 may be configured to receive some or all of the handle 2033. The lid 2012 may be subsequently rotated relative to the receiving feature 2014 and about the handle 2033. This may cause the lid 2012 to translate the reagent container 2030 further into the analysis device 2004, and facilitate a fluidic connection between the reagent container 2030 and the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004.
[0261] FIG. 21 B shows the reagent container 2030 removed from the receiving feature 2014 of the analysis device 2004. In particular, FIG. 21 B shows the reagent container 2030 removed from the receiving feature 2014 and rotated to show a back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030. The back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030 may be positioned fully within the analysis device 2004 when reagent container 2030 is installed within the receiving feature 2014. At the back plate 2066, the reagent container 2030 may include various openings, vents, conduits, channels, and so forth to facilitate fluidically coupling the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
[0262] As one possibility, shown in FIG. 21 B, the reagent container 2030 may include conduits 2034 positioned at the back plate 2066. Each of the conduits 2034, as described in greater detail below, may be fluidically coupled with an internal chamber of the reagent container 2030 (e.g., such as one of a group of internal chambers separating a first reagent, a second reagent, a waste volume, an air filter, and so forth). As such, the conduits 2034, rather than represent a particular directional flow or chemical compound, may more generally correspond to a passageway or channel that operates to fluidically couple the respective internal chambers with corresponding ones of the fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004, for example, when the reagent container 2030 is engaged within the receiving feature 2014.
[0263] For example, the analysis device 2004 may include fluidic connections 2015 positioned or partially within the receiving feature 2014. Each of the fluidic connections 2015 may be fluidically coupled with corresponding ones of the conduits 2034 of the reagent container 2030, for example, when the reagent container 2030 is engaged within the receiving feature 2014. Fluid may thus flow between the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004 using the fluidic connections 2015 and the conduits 2034.
[0264] The reagent container 2030 may also include various structures that facilitate alignment of the reagent container 2030 within the receiving feature 2014. For example, the reagent container 2030 may include alignment features 2036 positioned along the back plate 2066. The analysis device 2004 may include corresponding alignment feature 2016. The alignment features 2036, in one embodiment, may be holes, recesses, grooves, and so forth and the corresponding alignment features 2016 of the analysis device 2004 may be cantilevered structures, pins, protrusions, and so forth that are received by the alignment features 2036 when the reagent container 2030 is appropriately positioned within the receiving feature 2014.
[0265] The reagent container 2030 may also include a computer identification element 2038. The computer identification element 2038 may be an RFID tag, machine readable symbol, and/or other component configured to identify the reagent container 2030. For example, the analysis device 2004 may include a computer identification element reader (not shown in FIG. 21 B) that may identify the reagent container 2030 based on information associated with the computer identification element 2038. This may include a serial number, chemical composition, manufacturing origination, disposal requirements, and so forth.
[0266] FIGs. 22A and 22B present simplified cross-sectional views of the reagent container of FIG. 21 B, taken along line B-B of FIG. 21 B. In particular, FIGs. 22A and 22B depict a group of internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 including reagents, air filters, and/or waste volumes, as may be appropriate for a given application.
[0267] With reference to FIG. 22A, an embodiment of the reagent container is shown having a first internal chamber 2040a and a second internal chamber 2040b. The first internal chamber 2040a may be configured to hold a first reagent 2041 a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be configured to hold a second reagent 2041 b. The first reagent 2041 a and the second reagent 2041 b may be one or more of MeOH (of various concentrations), a dye, a buffer, a calibrant, a catalyst, and other substantially any other chemical compound that may facilitate the HPLC process performed by the analysis device 2004.
[0268] As described herein, the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may each be fluidically coupled with the analysis device 2004, for example, at corresponding fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004. As such, each of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may have a conduit that may define a flow path between the analysis device 2004 and a corresponding one of the first reagent 2041 a, the second reagent 2041 b, and other feature of the respective internal chamber (including a waste volume or air filter, described below with respect to FIG. 22B). For example, in the embodiment of FIG. 22A, the reagent container 2030 may include a first conduit 2034a fluidically coupled with the first internal chamber 2040a and a second conduit 2034b fluidically coupled with the second internal chamber 2040b. Broadly, each of the conduits may be positioned at or near a bottom portion of the respective internal chamber, which may facilitate fluid flow into and/or from the internal chamber; however, in other cases, other positions for the conduits are possible.
[0269] The internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may also be fluidically coupled with a vent. The vent may allow air (filtered or non-filtered) into a corresponding one of the internal chambers when the fluid is expelled or dispensed (such as being expelled or dispensed from a corresponding one of the fluidically coupled conduits). This may help mitigate vacuum formation within the internal volume when fluid is expelled. Additionally or alternatively, the vent may allow air to exit an internal chamber when fluid is received within the chamber (such as a waste stream of an HPLC process being received at a
corresponding one of the fluidically coupled conduits). This may help mitigate pressure formation within the internal volume of the chamber when fluid is received.
[0270] In the embodiment of FIG. 22A, the reagent container 2030 may include a first opening 2042a fluidically coupled with the first internal chamber 2040a and a second opening 2042b fluidically coupled with the second internal chamber 2040b. The first opening 2042a may define a vent for the first internal chamber 2040a and the second opening 2042b may define a vent for the second internal chamber 2040b. Broadly, each of the vents may be positioned at or near a top portion of the respective internal chamber, which may facilitate the venting of air into and/or from the internal chamber; however, in other cases, other positions for the vent are possible. In some cases, the vents may also be positioned laterally offset from a conduit or other fluidic passage that is used to fill and/or empty the contents of the corresponding internal chamber.
[0271] Various valves, membranes, seals, stoppers, and other flow control structures may be positioned within the conduits and/or the openings (e.g., vents) of the reagent container 2030. Such flow control structures may allow fluid, for example, to propagate into and/or from a respective internal chamber of the reagent container 2030 when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004. When the reagent container 2030 is disengaged from the analysis device 2004, the flow control structures may substantially seal the internal chambers from an external environment. In this regard, FIG. 22A depicts a first directional flow valve 2044a and the second directional flow valve 2044b. The first directional flow valve 2044a may be positioned within, or partially within, the first conduit 2034a and operable to control flow into and/or from the first internal chamber 2040a. The second directional flow valve 2044b may be positioned within, or partially within, the second conduit 2034b and operable to control flow into and/or from the second internal chamber 2040b.
[0272] Flow control structures may also control flow of vents of the reagent container 2030. For example, FIG. 22A depicts a first directional vent valve 2046a and the second directional vent valve 2046b. The first directional vent valve 2046a may be positioned within, or partially within, the first opening 2042a and operable to equalize pressure within the first internal chamber 2040a while maintaining at least a partial fluidic seal. The second directional vent valve 2046b may be positioned within, or partially within, the second opening 2042b and operable to equalize pressure within the second internal chamber 2040b while maintaining at least a partial fluidic seal.
[0273] With reference to FIG. 22B, an embodiment of the reagent container 2030 is shown having the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b. The reagent container 2030 of FIG. 22B also includes a third internal chamber 2040c and a fourth internal chamber 2004d. Substantially analogous to the embodiment of FIG. 22A, the reagent container 2030 may include a third conduit 2034c, a fourth conduit 2034d, a third opening 2042c, a fourth opening 2042d, a third directional flow valve 2044c, a fourth directional flow valve 2044d, and a third directional vent valve 2044d. Redundant explanation of these components is omitted her for clarity.
[0274] As described above with respect to FIG. 22A, the first internal chamber 2040a may be configured to hold the first reagent 2041 a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be configured to hold the second reagent 2041 b. The first reagent 2041 a may be a distinct chemical compound from that of the second reagent 2041 b held within the second internal chamber 2004b. For example, the first reagent 2041 a may be one of MeOH (of various concentrations), a dye, a catalyst, a calibrant, a buffer, and the second reagent 2041 b may be another one of such chemical compounds. It will be appreciated that the reagent container 2030 may include further internal chamber for additional reagents, and are described, for example, with respect to FIGs. 23A - 24C.
[0275] The third internal chamber 2040c may define a waste volume of the reagent container 2030. For example, the third internal chamber 2040c may be substantially unfilled prior to engagement of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004. The third internal chamber 2040c may be fluidically coupled with a waste output of stream of the HPLC process implemented by the analysis device 2004. As multiple iterations of the HPLC process are performed, waste may flow into the third internal chamber 2040c (e.g., via the third conduit 2034c and the third directional flow valve 2044c). The reagent container 2030 may be subsequently removed from the analysis device 2004, thereby allowing for waste disposal.
[0276] The fourth internal chamber 2040d may define an air filter volume of the reagent container 2030. For example, the fourth internal chamber 2040d may include or partially include an air filter 2043. The fourth internal chamber 2040d may be fluidically coupled with, in one embodiment, an air intake of the HPLC process implemented by the analysis device 2004. The air filter 2043 may be positioned along, or fluidically coupled with, an external environment (e.g., at the fourth opening 2042d). The analysis device 2004 may thus be configured to draw air from the fourth internal chamber 2040d, which causes air to flow from atmosphere (e.g., from the fourth opening 2042d), through the air filter 2043 (thus filtering the atmospheric air), and out of the fourth internal chamber 2040d using the fourth conduit 2034d. Because the air filter 2043 may be a component of the reagent container 2030, the analysis device 2004 may receive filtered air through a new filter with each subsequent replacement reagent container used with the analysis device 2004.
[0277] FIGs. 23A and 23B depict the back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030, according to different embodiments. As described herein, the reagent container 2030 may include various conduits, vents, alignment features, computer identification elements, and/or other features or structures that may facilitate coupling (fluid, mechanical, and/or otherwise) the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004.
[0278] With reference to FIG. 23A, a back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030 is shown in an assembled configuration. In the embodiment of FIG. 23A, the reagent container 2030 may include eight conduits positioned at the back plate 2066. For example, the reagent container of FIG. 23A includes the first conduit 2034a, the second conduit 2034b, the third conduit 2034c, the fourth conduit 2034d, a fifth conduit 2034e, a sixth conduit 2034f, a seventh conduit 2034g, and an eighth conduit 2034h (collectively referred to herein as “conduits 2034”). The conduits 2034 may generally define a flow path through at least a portion of the back plate 2066 and toward internal chambers of the reagent container 2030.
It will be appreciated that while the embodiment of Fig. 23A shows eight separate conduits, other embodiments are possible, including embodiments having more or less conduits.
[0279] Each of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may be fluidically coupled to one or more of the conduits 2034. In this regard, each of the conduits 2034 may be fluidically coupled to reagents, waste volumes, air filters, and so forth that may be held or positioned within respective ones of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030. Accordingly, the conduits 2034 may be configured to allow flow into and/or from the reagent container 2030, based on the configuration of the fluidically coupled internal chamber.
[0280] For purposes of illustration each of the conduits 2034 may include a directional valve 2050. As described in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 25A - 25C, the directional valve 2050 may generally operate to seal a corresponding one of the conduits 2034 when the reagent container 2030 is disengaged from the analysis device 2004. The directional valve 2050 may also be configured to unseal the corresponding one of the conduits 2034 when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004, thereby allowing the analysis device 2004 to induce flow into and/or out of the internal chambers of the reagent container 2030.
[0281] As described herein, the reagent container 2030 may generally include two or more internal chambers, each configured to hold distinct reagent chemical compounds. Additional internal chambers may be included in the reagent container 2030 in order to hold further reagents, air filters, waste volumes, and so forth. The number of internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may at least partially depend on the input/output requirements of the chemical processes of the analysis device 2004. For example, the reagent container 2030 may include an appropriate number of internal chambers so that each and every (or a predetermined subset) of the input/output requirements of the chemical of the analysis device 2004 are met by the reagent container 2030. This may allow the chemical processes of the analysis device 2004 to run substantially unattended, drawing from reagents held within the reagent container 2030 as needed, and, at least substantially analogously, dispensing into the reagent container 2030 as the chemical processes are performed.
[0282] The embodiment of the reagent container 2030 shown in FIGs. 23A - 24C may include a sufficient number of internal chambers to meet the input/output requirements of the HPLC process performed by the analysis device 2004, described herein. For example, and with reference to the HPLC process described herein, the reagent container 2030 may include at least an internal chamber (and fluidically coupled conduit) for: (i) MeOH 100%; (ii) a buffer; (iii) a waste volume; (iv) a filtered air intake; (v) a dye; (vi) a catalyst; (vii) a calibrant; and (viii) MEOH 40%. While a variety of different configurations are possible, in the embodiment of FIGs. 23A - 24C, the first conduit 2034a may be fluidically coupled with the MeOH 100% (held within a first internal chamber 2040a), the second conduit 2034b may be fluidically coupled with the buffer (held within a second internal chamber 2040b), the third conduit 2034c may be fluidically coupled with the waste volume (defined at least partially by a third internal chamber 2040c), the fourth conduit 2034d may be fluidically coupled with the filtered air intake (defined at least partially by a fourth internal chamber 2040d), the fifth conduit 2034e may be fluidically coupled with the dye (held within a fifth internal chamber 2040e), the sixth conduit 2034f may be fluidically coupled with the catalyst (held within a sixth internal chamber 2040f ), the seventh conduit 2034g may be fluidically coupled with the catalyst (held within a seventh internal chamber 2040g), and the eighth conduit 2034h may be fluidically coupled with MeOH 40% (held within an eighth internal chamber 2040h). It will be appreciated, however, that the conduits and internal chambers of the reagent container 2030 may not be limited to the configuration above; rather, the conduits and/or internal chambers may be fluidically coupled to an appropriate reagent or volume to perform the various functions of the reagent containers described herein. [0283] Each of the conduits 2034 may extend at least partially through the back plate 2066 and into the enclosure 2032 in order to fluidically couple corresponding ones of the internal chambers 2040a - 2040h (collectively referred to herein as“internal chambers 2040”) (not shown in FIG. 23A) with the analysis device 2004. As explained in greater detail below with respect to FIGs. 24A - 24C, the internal chambers 2040 may be defined by various different internal walls of the enclosure 2032. Each of the internal chambers 2040 may have a distinct size and/or shape configured to define a predetermined volume corresponding to the particular reagent or other feature of a given one of the internal chambers 2040.
[0284] Notwithstanding, at least one of the internal chambers 2040 may be defined along a surface of the back plate 2066. For example and with reference to FIG. 23B, the back plate 2066 may define the fourth internal chamber 2040d. The fourth internal chamber 2040d, for example, may be a groove, channel, notch, and so forth defined in a surface of the back plate 2066. The fourth internal chamber 2040d, with continued reference to FIG. 23A, may be sealed from an external environment using a back sealing layer 2048. As described herein, the fourth internal chamber 2040d may be used to provide filtered air to the analysis device 2004.
[0285] In the embodiment of FIG. 23A, the fourth internal chamber 2040d may be fluidically coupled with the fourth conduit 2034d and the fourth opening 2042d. An air filter 2043 may be positioned at least partially within one or both of the fourth opening 2042d and/or the fourth internal chamber 2040d. At least one surface of the air filter 2043 may be exposed to ambient air. The fourth conduit 2034d may be configured to fluidically coupled with the analysis device 2004. In particular, the analysis device 2004 may be configured to draw air through the air filter 2043 (from an external environment), along vent path V1 through the fourth internal chamber 2040d, and into the analysis device 2004 via the fourth conduit 2034d. The vent path V1 thus represents a flow path through the fourth internal chamber 2040d (below the back sealing layer 2048).
[0286] FIG. 23A also depicts various structural features of the reagent container 2030 that may facilitate alignment of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004.
For example, the reagent container may include a first alignment feature 2036a positioned at the back plate 2066 and a second alignment feature 2036b positioned at the back plate 2066. Each of the first alignment feature 2036a and the second alignment feature 2036b may be recesses or grooves formed in a surface of the reagent container 2030 defined by the back plate 2066.
[0287] In the embodiment of FIG. 23A, the first alignment feature 2036a may be defined by an elongated shape that is configured to receive an alignment feature of the analysis device 2004 having a corresponding shape. The corresponding elongated shapes of the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004 may limit rotation of the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004. The second alignment feature 2036b may be substantially circular and configured to receive an alignment feature of the analysis device 2004 having a corresponding shape. The corresponding shapes of the reagent container 2030 and the analysis device 2004 may thus facilitate positioning of the reagent container 2030 within the analysis device 2004. It will be appreciated, however, that other shapes and configurations of the alignment features are possible, including embodiments having more or fewer alignment features.
[0288] In certain embodiment, such as that shown in FIG. 23A, the reagent container 2030 may have a perimeter that is at least partially defined by a planar or flat portion. For example, the reagent container 2030 of FIG. 23A includes a perimeter alignment portion 2067. The perimeter alignment portion 2067 may be flat and may correspond to a substantially flat surface or contour of the analysis device 2004. This may indicate to a user the proper orientation of the reagent container 2030 relative to the analysis device 2004, and guide the reagent container 2030 toward the various other alignment features, conduits, tubes, pins, and so forth of the analysis device 2004, as described herein.
[0289] With reference to FIG. 23B, the back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030 is shown. In particular, the back plate 2066 is shown in a configuration in which the back sealing layer 2048 is removed. When the back sealing layer 2048 is removed, as shown in FIG. 23B, the fourth internal chamber 2040d is exposed.
[0290] As described herein, each of the internal chambers of the reagent container may be fluidically coupled with a vent. The vent may be an opening in the reagent container 2030 that allows air to enter and/or exit an internal chamber. This may reduce pressure variations within the internal chambers, which may be caused when fluid enters and/or exits a given one of the internal chambers 2040, for example, from a fluidically coupled conduit.
[0291] In the embodiment of FIG. 23B, each of the vents may be, or include, openings positioned at the back plate 2066 of the reagent container 2030. For example, FIG. 23B shows a first opening 2042a, a second opening 2042b, a third opening 2042c, a fourth opening 2042d, a fifth opening 2042e, a sixth opening 2042f, a seventh opening 2042g, and an eighth opening 2042h (collectively referred to herein as the“openings 2042”). The openings 2042 may be fluidically coupled to a corresponding one of the internal chambers 2040. As one possibility, and as shown in greater detail with respect to FIGs. 24A - 24C, the first opening 2042a may be fluidically coupled with the first internal chamber 2040a, the second opening 2042b may be fluidically coupled with the second internal chamber 2040b, the third opening 2042c may be fluidically coupled with the third internal chamber 2040c, the fourth opening 2042d may be fluidically coupled with the fourth internal chamber 2040d, the fifth opening 2042e may be fluidically coupled with the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth opening 2042f may be fluidically coupled with the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh opening 2042g may be fluidically coupled with the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth opening 2042h may be fluidically coupled with the eight internal chamber 2040h.
[0292] At least some of the openings 2042 may be configured to allowed filtered air into corresponding ones of the internal chambers 2040. This may be facilitated by fluidically coupling some of the openings 2042 with the air filter 2043 using the fourth internal chamber 2040d. For example, ambient air may travel into the fourth internal chamber 2040d through the air filter 2043. Filtered air output from the air filter 2043 may travel along a vent path V2 and toward select ones of the openings 2042. Accordingly, the select ones of the openings 2042 that receive the filtered air along the vent path V2 may be positioned within, or otherwise fluidically coupled with, the fourth internal chamber 2040d.
[0293] For purposes of illustration, positioned within, or otherwise fluidically coupled with, the fourth internal chamber 2040d include: the first opening 2042a, the second opening 2042b, the fourth opening 2042d, the fifth opening 2042e, the sixth opening 2042f, the seventh opening 2042g, and the eighth opening 2042h. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back sealing layer 2048 may seal the fourth internal chamber 2040d from an external environment. As such, ambient air may be drawn into the fourth internal chamber 2040d through the air filter 2043. The filtered air may subsequently travel along vent path V2 and into various ones of the internal chambers 2040 via a corresponding one of the openings 2042 positioned within the fourth internal chamber 2040d. For example, filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the first internal chamber 2040a at the first opening 2042a, filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the second internal chamber 2040b at the second opening 2042b, filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the fifth internal chamber 2040e at the fifth opening 2042e, filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the sixth internal chamber 2040f at the sixth opening 2042f, filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the seventh internal chamber 2040g at the seventh opening 2042g, and filtered air may travel along vent path V2 and into the eighth internal chamber 2040h at the eighth opening 2042h. It will be appreciated that filtered air may flow into a particular one of the foregoing internal chambers 2040 when reagent is dispensed from a corresponding ones of the conduits 2034. This may help mitigate vacuum formation within an internal chamber as fluid is dispensed.
[0294] At least one of the openings may be used to expel air from a fluidically coupled one of the internal chambers (such as when the chamber is being filled with fluid). For example, FIG. 23B shows the third opening 2042c positioned at the back plate 2066. The third opening 2042c may define a vent for the fluidically coupled third internal chamber 2040c. As described herein, the third internal chamber 2040c may be a waste volume or internal drum of the reagent container 2030 that is operable to receive a waste output of the HPLC process of the analysis device 2004. As such, the third opening 2042c may help relieve pressure within the third internal chamber 2040c, for example, when the third internal chamber 2040c is filled with the waste output. As such, the third opening 2042c is shown as being not fluidically coupled with the air filter 2043. Rather, the third opening 2042c may be fluidically coupled to the analysis device 2004 when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004. This may allow the analysis device 2004 to receive overflow waste from the third internal chamber 2040c, which may help mitigate spilling, for example, where the analysis device 2004 employs a false bottom (e.g., false bottom 1510 of FIG. 18) or other spill containment structure.
[0295] FIGs. 24A - 24C show exploded views of the reagent container 2030 described herein. In particular, FIGs. 24A - 24C show a particular embodiment of the shape and contours of the internal chambers, such as the first internal chamber 2040a, the second internal chamber 2040b, the third internal chamber 2040c, the fourth internal chamber 2040d, the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h, described herein. It will be appreciated, however, that other shapes and contours of the internal chambers 2040 are possible, including larger or smaller internal chambers, and thus the embodiments of FIG. 24A - 24C are presented for purposes of illustration only.
[0296] With reference to FIG. 24A, the enclosure 2032 may generally be an assembly of multiple internal shells, walls, drums, and so forth that are connected to one another to define the various internal chambers described herein. As described above with respect to FIGs. 23A and 23B, the enclosure 2032 may include the back plate 2066. The back plate 2066 may define a series of holes or openings that house the various vents, conduits, valves, and so forth, as described herein.
[0297] The enclosure 2032 may also include an inner drum 2060 and an outer cover 2072. Broadly, the inner drum 2060 may include a group of internal walls that define or partially define that various internal chambers described herein. In some cases, the inner walls may extend along a subset of one or more of a height, a length, or a width of the enclosure 2032. Accordingly, as shown below, one or more internal films, membranes, or other seals may be positioned within or along the inner drum 2060 in order to isolate one or more of the internal chambers 2040 of the enclosure 2032.
[0298] The outer cover 2072 may generally be positioned over the inner drum 2060. In some cases, one or more of the internal chambers 2040 of the enclosure 2032 may be at least partially defined within the outer cover 2072. The handle 2033, described above with respect to FIG. 20A may be attached to the outer cover 2072.
[0299] By way of particular example, the inner drum 2060 may include internal walls 2062. The internal walls 2062 may be of generally uniform thickness and may cooperate to define various distinct three-dimensional geometries within the inner drum 2060. For example, the internal walls 2062 may cooperate to define at least the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h as being less than one or more of (or all of ) a height dimension, a width dimension, and/or a length dimension of the inner drum 2060.
[0300] It will be appreciated, and with reference to FIGs. 23A and 23B, that
corresponding ones of the openings and conduits may be fluidically coupled with the internal chambers shown in FIGs. 24A - 24C. For example, the fifth internal chamber 2040e may be fluidically coupled with the fifth conduit 2034e and the fifth opening 2042e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f may be fluidically coupled with the sixth conduit 2034f and the sixth opening 2042f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g may be fluidically coupled with the seventh conduit 2034g and the seventh opening 2042g, the eighth internal chamber 2040h may be fluidically coupled with the eighth conduit 2034h and the eighth opening 2042h.
[0301] With reference to FIG. 24B, each of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h may be sealed within the inner drum 2060 by a first inner drum sealing layer 2049a. The first inner drum sealing layer 2049a may extend over ends of certain ones of the internal walls 2062 in order to define an enclosed and isolated volume within the inner drum 2060 for each of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h.
[0302] With continued reference to FIG. 24B, the internal walls 2062 may also define the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b within the inner drum 2060. For example, at least a portion of the internal walls 2062 may generally bisect the inner drum 2060. The first internal chamber 2040a may be defined at a first side of the bisection. The second internal chamber 2040b may be defined at a second side of the bisection and at least partially surrounding the group of (or a subset of) the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h. As described above, the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h may be sealed within the inner drum 2060 by the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a and thus the second internal chamber 2040b is separated from each of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h by the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a.
[0303] It will be appreciated, and with reference to FIGs. 23A and 23B, that
corresponding ones of the openings and conduits may be fluidically coupled with the internal chambers shown in FIGs. 24A - 24C. For example, the first internal chamber 2040a may be fluidically coupled with the first conduit 2034a and the first opening 2042a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be fluidically coupled with the second conduit 2034b and the second opening 2042b.
[0304] With reference to FIG. 24C, each of the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b may be sealed within the inner drum 2060 by a second inner drum sealing layer 2049b. The second inner drum sealing layer 2049b may extend over ends of certain ones of the internal walls 2062 in order to define an enclosed and isolated volume within the inner drum 2060 for each of the first internal chamber 2040a and the second internal chamber 2040b.
[0305] With continued reference to FIG. 24C, the inner drum 2060 and the outer cover 2072 may cooperate to define the third internal chamber 2040c of the reagent container 2030. For example, the third internal chamber 2040c may be at least partially defined by an inner volume of the outer cover 2072, and bounded within the reagent container 2030 by the second inner drum sealing layer 2049b. The third internal chamber 2040c may be fluidically coupled with the third opening 2042c and the third conduit 2034c, described herein. Each of the third opening 2042c and the third conduit 2034c may be positioned along the back plate 2066. As such, each of the third opening 2042c and the third conduit 2034c may extend from the back plate 2066 and through at least a portion of the inner drum 2060 in order to reach the third internal chamber 2040c. For example, the third conduit 2034c may extend through one or more of the internal walls 2062 of the inner drum 2060 (shown with respect to FIGs. 24A and 24B) and the third opening 2042c may extend at least partially along a periphery of the inner drum 2060. Accordingly, the third internal chamber 2040c may be configured for fluidic coupling along the back plate 2066 (e.g., using the third conduit 2034c and the third opening 2042c) while remaining separated within the reagent container 2030 from the others of the group of internal chambers 2040.
[0306] FIGs. 25A - 25C depict various cross-sectional details of the reagent container 2030 in an assembled configuration. In particular, FIGs. 25A - 25C depict the reagent container 2030 having the group of internal chambers 2040 and the operation of one of more direction valves that may control flow into and/or from a particular internal chamber.
[0307] With reference to FIG. 25A, a cross-sectional view of the reagent container of FIG. 24C, taken along section C-C of FIG. 24C is shown. In the assembled configuration, the third internal chamber 2040c is shown as being defined within the outer cover 2072 and separated from the inner drum 2060 by the second inner drum sealing layer 2049b. Further, in the assembled configuration, the second internal chamber 2040b is shown as being defined within the inner drum 2060 and sealed between the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a and the second inner drum sealing layer 2049b. As described above, the first inner drum sealing layer 2049a is positioned along ends of the internal walls 2062 and used to seal, within the inner drum 2060, at least the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h. Accordingly, the second internal chamber 2040b may be sealed from and positioned at least partially around (such as being positioned along two, three, four, or more sides) of the group of the fifth internal chamber 2040e, the sixth internal chamber 2040f, the seventh internal chamber 2040g, and the eighth internal chamber 2040h.
[0308] As described above, each of the group of internal chambers 2040 may be fluidically coupled with a conduit. The conduit may include a directional valve. The directional valve may be normally closed, thus sealing a corresponding one of the group of internal chambers 2040 from an exterior environment. When the reagent container 2030 is engaged with an analysis device, the directional valve may unseat and thus define a flow path between the internal chamber and the engaged analysis device.
[0309] In the example embodiment of FIG. 25A, a sample directional valve 2050 is shown. The sample directional valve 2050 may operate to seal a conduit, passage, tube, and so forth in a first mode and unseal the conduit in a second mode, and thereby defining a flow path through the conduit. The sample directional valve 2050 is shown for purposes of illustration as being positioned within the fifth conduit 2034e. Accordingly, the sample directional valve 2050 is described herein as having functionality and structural relationships associated with the fifth conduit 2034e and the associated fifth internal chamber 2040e. It will be appreciated, however, that the sample directional valve 2050 may be positioned within substantially any of the conduits described herein, and thus, any functionality and/or structural relationship described herein with respect to the fifth conduit 2034e and/or the fifth internal chamber 2040e may be substantially analogous to any of the conduits and/or internal chambers described herein. Further, in other embodiments, other implementations of directional valves are possible, and, as such, the sample directional valve 2050 is shown in FIGs. 25A - 25C for purposes of illustration.
[0310] With reference to FIG. 25B, detail 1 -1 is depicted of FIG. 25A of the sample directional valve 2050 in a first mode. In the first mode, the reagent container 2030 may be disengaged from an analysis device. When the reagent container 2030 is disengaged from the analysis device, the sample directional valve 2050 may be configured to seal the fifth internal chamber 2040e.
[0311] The sample directional valve may generally include an o-seal 2052 and a deformable plug 2054. The o-seal 2052 may be positioned about a perimeter of the fifth conduit 2034e at an exterior surface of the reagent container 2030. The o-seal 2052 may have a hollow or through portion that extends into the fifth conduit 2034e.
[0312] The deformable plug 2054 may be positioned within the fifth conduit 2034e and operate to selectively seal the fifth internal chamber 2040e at the o-seal 2052. For example, the deformable plug 2054 may generally include a stopper 2056 and a biasing member 2058. The stopper 2056 may be a plunger or half-dome shape that contacts or is otherwise seated at the o-seal 2052 in order to seal the fifth internal chamber 2040e from an exterior environment. The biasing member 2058 may be attached to the stopper 2056 and define a spring-type member that biases or presses the stopper 2056 toward the o-seal 2052. For example, the biasing member 2058 may bias the stopper 2056 toward the o-seal 2052 with force sufficient to prevent or mitigate fluid flow from the fifth internal chamber 2040e through the fifth conduit 2034e. The biasing member 2058 may be compressed to unseat the stopper 2056 from the o-seal 2052, and thus induce flow into and/or from the fifth internal chamber 2040e.
[0313] With reference to FIG. 25C, detail 1 -1 is depicted of FIG. 25A of the directional valve 2050 in a second mode. In the second mode, the reagent container 2030 may be engaged with an analysis device. When the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device, the directional valve 2050 may be configured to unseal the fifth internal chamber 2040e.
[0314] For example, as shown in FIG. 25C, the fifth conduit 2034e may receive a fluidic connection 2015 of the analysis device 2004, shown with respect to FIGs. 20 - 21 B. The fluidic connection 2015 may be a hollow tube, pin, or other instrument of the analysis device 2004 that is fluidically connected to one or more processes of the analysis device 2004. The fluidic connection 2015 may be sufficiently rigid such that it may contact the stopper 2056 and translate the stopper 2056 inward into the fifth conduit 2034e. For example, the fluidic connection 2015 may be sufficiently rigid such that it compresses the biasing member 2058, which in turn allows for the translation of the stopper 2056.
[0315] As shown in FIG. 25C, upon translation of the stopper 2056 inward, the stopper 2056 may unseat from the o-seal 2052. This may cause flow to travel into the fifth internal chamber 2040e using the fifth conduit 2034e. At least a portion of the stopper 2056 may include or be defined by a chamfered surface. As such, fluid from (or into) the fluidic connection 2015 may travel around the stopper 2056, through the biasing member 2058, and into the fifth internal chamber 2040e. This may be further facilitated, for example, where the biasing member 2058 is a helically shaped spring member; however, this is not required.
[0316] To facilitate the reader’s understanding of the various functionalities of the embodiments discussed herein, reference is now made to the flow diagram in FIG. 26, which illustrates process 2600. While specific steps (and orders of steps) of the methods presented herein have been illustrated and will be discussed, other methods (including more, fewer, or different steps than those illustrated) consistent with the teachings presented herein are also envisioned and encompassed with the present disclosure.
[0317] In this regard, with reference to FIG. 26, process 2600 relates generally to operating a reagent container with an analysis device. The process 2600 may be used with any of the breath analysis systems, breath analysis devices, and reagent containers described herein, for example, such as breath analysis systems 100, 2000; analysis device 104, 300, 2004; and sample capture assembly 2020, and variations and embodiments thereof.
[0318] At operation 2604, a reagent container may be inserted into the analysis device. For example and with reference to FIGs. 21 A and 21 B, the reagent container 2030 may be inserted into the analysis device 2004. As described herein, the analysis device 2004 may include receiving feature 2014. The receiving feature 2014 may be defined by a similar shape and contour as the reagent container 2030. Various fluidic connections, pins, alignment features, and so forth of the analysis device 2004 may be positioned within the receiving feature 2014. This may allow a user to align a positioned alignment feature and a rotational alignment feature of the reagent container 2030 with the analysis device 2004. In some cases, the reagent container 2030 may include a computer identification element and the analysis device 2004 may be configured to identify information corresponding to the reagent container 2030 using the computer identification element.
[0319] At operation 2608, for a first breath sample, reagent from a first of a group of internal chambers may be dispensed. For example and with reference to FIGs. 22A and 22B, the first reagent 2041 a may be dispensed from the reagent container 2030. As one possibility, the first reagent 2041 a may be dispensed from the reagent container 2030 through the first conduit 2034a when the reagent container 2030 is received within the receiving feature 2014 and engaged with one or more alignment features or fluidic connections of the analysis device 2004. As described herein, the first conduit 2034a may include a deformable plug or valve. Flow may be induced around and/or through this plug when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004.
[0320] At operation 2612, for the first breath sample, filtered air from a second of a group of the internal chambers may be dispensed. For example and with reference to FIGs. 22A and 22B, ambient air may be drawn from the fourth opening 2042d and through the air filter 2043. This may cause the fourth internal chamber 2040d to hold a filtered air. When the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004, filtered air may be dispensed from the fourth internal chamber 2040d and into the analysis device 2004, for example, through the fourth conduit 2034d.
[0321] At operation 2616, waste from the analysis device may be received by a third of a group of the internal chambers. For example and with reference to FIGs. 22A and 22B, waste from the analysis device 2004 may be received within the third internal chamber 2040c. As one possibility, when the reagent container 2030 is engaged with the analysis device 2004, waste may flow into the third internal chamber 2040c from the third conduit 2034c. This may allow the reagent container 2030 to function as a collection device for the outputs of the chemical processes of the analysis device 2004.
[0322] At operation 2620, the operations 2608 - 2616 may be repeated for a second breath sample. For example and with reference to FIGs. 20 - 21 B, the analysis device 2004 may be configured for multiple, successive analyses of patient breath samples. For example, the analysis device 2004 may be used in a clinical setting in which multiple samples are collected from patients and analyzed using the analysis device 2004 by substantially untrained personnel. In the sample process 2600, the reagent container 2030 may be configured for repeated use, across the multiple breath samples analyzed by the analysis device 2004. For example, the reagent container 2030 may include a quantity of at least a first reagent and a second reagent for the first breath sample and the second breath sample. Accordingly, the analysis device 2004 may operate to determine an aldehyde content of multiple patient breath samples using the same reagent container. This may facilitate use of the analysis device for multiple, successive analyses, for example, by reducing an interval for maintaining or restocking the analysis device 2004 with additional chemical compounds. For example, the reagent container 2030 may include sufficient reagents so that the analysis device 2004 may analyze breath samples of each patient of a clinician on a given day or week, as one possibility.
[0323] Other examples and implementations are within the scope and spirit of the disclosure and appended claims. For example, features implementing functions may also be physically located at various positions, including being distributed such that portions of functions are implemented at different physical locations. Also, as used herein, including in the claims,“or” as used in a list of items prefaced by“at least one of” indicates a disjunctive list such that, for example, a list of“at least one of A, B, or C” means A or B or C or AB or AC or BC or ABC ( i.e ., A and B and C). Further, the term“exemplary” does not mean that the described example is preferred or better than other examples. [0324] The foregoing description, for purposes of explanation, uses specific nomenclature to provide a thorough understanding of the described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that the specific details are not required in order to practice the described embodiments. Thus, the foregoing descriptions of the specific embodiments described herein are presented for purposes of illustration and description. They are not targeted to be exhaustive or to limit the embodiments to the precise forms disclosed. It will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1 . A reagent container for an analysis device, comprising:
a first reagent;
a second reagent;
an air filter; and
an enclosure having a group of internal chambers separating the first reagent, the second reagent, and the air filter from one another within the enclosure, wherein:
the reagent container is configured to be received by the analysis device; and each of the group of internal chambers is fluidically coupled to a conduit that defines a flow path between the analysis device and a corresponding one of the first reagent, the second reagent, or the air filter.
2. The reagent container of claim 1 , wherein:
the reagent container is configured to receive waste from the analysis device; and the group of internal chambers separates the received waste from each of the first reagent, the second reagent, and the air filter.
3. The reagent container of claim 2, wherein the enclosure comprises:
an inner drum having internal walls that at least partially define the group of internal chambers; and
an outer cover positioned over the inner drum.
4. The reagent container of claim 3, wherein:
the reagent container further comprises a sealing layer positioned within the outer cover and over the inner drum; and
the sealing layer at least partially defines a first internal chamber of the group of internal chambers within the outer cover.
5. The reagent container of claim 4, wherein:
the inner drum has a height, a width, and a length;
one or more of the internal walls of the enclosure defines:
a second internal chamber of the group of internal chambers along a subset of at least one of the height, the width, or the length; and
a third internal chamber of the group of internal chambers along the at least one of the height, the width, or the length;
the sealing layer is a first sealing layer; and
the reagent container comprises a second sealing layer separating the second internal chamber from the third internal chamber within the inner drum.
6. The reagent container of claim 5, wherein the third internal chamber is at least partially positioned between the second internal chamber and the first internal chamber.
7. The reagent container of claim 1 , wherein:
the enclosure defines an opening along an exterior surface;
the air filter is positioned within the opening; and
the reagent container is configured to receive a suction that draws air through the air filter and into the group of internal chambers.
8. The reagent container of claim 1 , wherein:
the conduits extend from a corresponding one of the group of internal chambers to a common back plate of the enclosure;
the back plate includes two alignment features; and
the flow path between the analysis device and the conduits is defined based on an engagement of the two alignment features of the back plate with corresponding alignment features of the analysis device.
9. A reagent container for an analysis device, comprising:
an enclosure configured to be received by the analysis device and having a first internal chamber and a second internal chamber;
a first directional flow valve positioned along a first flow path extending from the first internal chamber and into the analysis device; and
a second directional flow valve positioned along a second flow path extending from the analysis device and into the second internal chamber, wherein:
in response to flow along the first flow path, the reagent container is configured to allow air into the first internal chamber; and
in response to flow along the second flow path, the reagent container is configured to expel air from the second internal chamber.
10. The reagent container of claim 9, wherein:
the enclosure defines a conduit extending from the first internal chamber to an exterior surface of the enclosure; and
the first directional flow valve comprises:
an o-seal positioned within the conduit at the exterior surface; and a deformable plug positioned within the conduit between the first internal chamber and the o-seal.
1 1 . The reagent container of claim 10, wherein the deformable plug comprises:
a stopper seated at the o-seal within the conduit; and a biasing member configured to press the stopper toward the o-seal.
12. The reagent container of claim 1 1 , wherein the conduit is configured to receive a pin of the analysis device that compresses the biasing member and unseats the stopper, thereby inducing flow through the first directional flow valve.
13. The reagent container of claim 9, wherein:
the first directional flow valve is positioned at a bottom of the first internal chamber; and
the reagent container is configured to allow air into the first internal chamber at a first directional vent valve positioned at a top of the first internal chamber and laterally offset from the first directional flow valve.
14. The reagent container of claim 9, wherein:
the reagent container further comprises:
an air filter positioned within an opening of the enclosure; and the air allowed into the first internal chamber at a first directional vent valve is filtered through the air filter.
15. The reagent container of claim 9, wherein:
the first directional flow valve and the second directional flow valve are positioned along a back plate of the enclosure;
the enclosure comprises a handle along a surface opposite the back plate; and the handle is configured to be received by a lid of the analysis device that advances the reagent container into a body of the analysis device when rotated.
16. A method for operating a reagent container with an analysis device, comprising:
1 ) inserting the reagent container into the analysis device;
for a first breath sample analyzed by the analysis device:
2) dispensing reagent from a first of a group of internal chambers of the reagent container;
3) dispensing filtered air from a second of the group of internal chambers of the reagent container; and
4) receiving waste from the analysis device into a third of the group of internal chambers of the reagent container; and
5) repeating steps 2 - 4 for a second breath sample analyzed by the analysis device.
17. The method of claim 16, further comprising:
repeating steps 1 - 5 for another reagent container with the analysis device.
18. The method of claim 16, wherein the inserting comprises:
aligning a position alignment feature and a rotational alignment feature of the reagent container with corresponding alignment features of the analysis device.
19. The method of claim 16, wherein the inserting comprises:
recognizing a computer identification element attached to the reagent container.
20. The method of claim 16, wherein the dispensing of the reagent comprises inducing flow through a directional flow valve by unseating a deformable plug.
PCT/US2018/036545 2018-03-15 2018-06-07 Reagent container for an aldehyde analysis system and method of use WO2019177645A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201862643412P 2018-03-15 2018-03-15
US62/643,412 2018-03-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019177645A1 true WO2019177645A1 (en) 2019-09-19

Family

ID=62779062

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2018/036545 WO2019177645A1 (en) 2018-03-15 2018-06-07 Reagent container for an aldehyde analysis system and method of use

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019177645A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5665315A (en) * 1994-08-18 1997-09-09 Abx Sa Automatic connection box for distributing reagents in a haematological analyzer
US6938502B2 (en) * 2001-09-06 2005-09-06 Sysmex Corporation Automatic sample analyzer and its components
US20090325276A1 (en) * 2006-09-27 2009-12-31 Micronics, Inc. Integrated microfluidic assay devices and methods
US20100268106A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2010-10-21 Nanomix, Inc. Breath condensate sampler and detector and breath/breath condensate sampler and detector
US20120241045A1 (en) * 2011-03-22 2012-09-27 Aouad Salah M Automated high precision solution preparation apparatus
US20170199210A1 (en) * 2016-01-11 2017-07-13 Illumina, Inc. Detection apparatus having a microfluorometer, a fluidic system, and a flow cell latch clamp module

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5665315A (en) * 1994-08-18 1997-09-09 Abx Sa Automatic connection box for distributing reagents in a haematological analyzer
US6938502B2 (en) * 2001-09-06 2005-09-06 Sysmex Corporation Automatic sample analyzer and its components
US20090325276A1 (en) * 2006-09-27 2009-12-31 Micronics, Inc. Integrated microfluidic assay devices and methods
US20100268106A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2010-10-21 Nanomix, Inc. Breath condensate sampler and detector and breath/breath condensate sampler and detector
US20120241045A1 (en) * 2011-03-22 2012-09-27 Aouad Salah M Automated high precision solution preparation apparatus
US20170199210A1 (en) * 2016-01-11 2017-07-13 Illumina, Inc. Detection apparatus having a microfluorometer, a fluidic system, and a flow cell latch clamp module

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20190257757A1 (en) Breath Capture and Analysis System
US11874286B1 (en) System and method for target substance identification
US8695401B2 (en) Handheld gas analysis systems for point-of-care medical applications
KR102448151B1 (en) Sequencing device
WO2013173524A9 (en) Clinical diagnostic system including instrument and cartridge
US8808621B2 (en) Liquid-mixing apparatus, chemical testing apparatus, and endoscope processing apparatus
US9841336B2 (en) Pressure sensor, measuring device, reaction carrier and measuring method
CN104394765A (en) System for measuring breath analytes
WO2019177644A1 (en) Sample capture assembly for an aldehyde analysis system and method of use
CN210146038U (en) Modular sample single-channel detection chip assembly of handheld SPR detector
CN109803761A (en) Analytical equipment and method for test sample
TW201828222A (en) Flow cell liquid degassing system and method
US9651530B2 (en) Methods and apparatus for measuring nitric oxide in fluid
WO2019177645A1 (en) Reagent container for an aldehyde analysis system and method of use
US9885693B2 (en) Measuring device, reaction carrier and measuring method
CN116121039A (en) Sample detection consumable and sample detection method
CN109916700A (en) A kind of small-sized Solid Phase Extraction and solid phase spectra detect aggregate device
KR102637128B1 (en) Apparatus and methods for bioprocesses and other processes
TWI826811B (en) Analysis system
CN110494751A (en) The detection of biomarker in the sample of flowable mass
US10960393B2 (en) Apparatus and methods for bioprocesses and other processes
CN113278509A (en) Chip device for nucleic acid detection
JP6644329B2 (en) Light guide path built-in chip, light guide member and light guide method
US9753019B2 (en) Measuring nitric oxide in fluid
JP2005257647A (en) Substance measuring instrument for nitrogen monoxide, etc. in blood

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18735077

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18735077

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1